Home

MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User`s Manual (Application)

1. target file exist target file exist YES NO Is file NO password set for the Can it be overwritten target file YES YES x quote passwd rd Enter a file password Is file read password leer password set for the target file Read the file get file name YES cs X Enter file password passwd write password delete file name Enter Delete or rename the file rename current file name new file name Write the file put file name Enter 1 FUNCTIONS 99 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server Logging into Ethernet equipped module This section describes the steps from starting FTP and logging into the Ethernet equipped module Start FTP from the Microsoft Windows command prompt Command Prompt ftp eon x Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76611 Copyright lt c gt 20809 Microsoft Corporation 11 rights reserved C Windows gt ftp 220 iQ R FIP server ready User lt 192 168 1 1 ee 331 Password required RJ71EN 71 start FTP Exer Connect with FTP server open Ethernet equipped module IP address Enter Specify login name login name Erter Specify password password Ester Use the login name and password tha
2. 2 2 2 147 IP Packet Transfer Setting sess ec bien eye eee x ce REOR Ra GC ao X PRIORE EN a 147 Network Dynamic Routing gt eee RE Ex RR ESE p ee REA 148 Module Operation 4 148 CHAPTER 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 149 3 1 Checking with LED is 2 22 sc 0 lt RR eee OE EMSS EQ 149 3 2 Checking the Module 151 3 3 Checking the Network 154 3 4 Troubleshooting by 161 3 5 List of Error Codes 222 See Gide dt est tetur tu ete eee ig usse aetna ee ae a Ae ape 169 3 6 2 25 522 2222 IDE GR Re oe ae ek phe EEG 183 3 7 Event eee Sak wale ie words pend onde 184 3 8 End Codes Returned to an External Device During Data Communications 186 Physical address and logical address of random access 87 11 12 APPENDICES 188 Appendix 1 Module Label 2 2522 2 REI ie ER Rx RU ELA Os
3. 61 Applicable connectlons iecur repo yere roe Pa ea aoa a ae cicer n Roa E 61 Communication 61 Sendi Procedure isi paige ews Rape hada do DERE dae dia acis d da ioe 63 Receive procedure viet he RERO eB PRE eee OR A ao NE REN RUE a 65 PANG OPEN D 69 Broadcast communications is soak osar riata preria edd pere E Ed Rhee 70 Data Formal A renee A aE aes E E E a laren ete A 70 Example of communications using a fixed buffer 75 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access 85 Setting procedure recepere Re Rachat Par eee Rae p aE ea ues eae 85 Communication Structures 3 c0cn ec ene hbase ees ek eed d REA AU E EROR ed eee 86 Procedure for reading from external device 2 86 Procedure for writing from external device 1 86 10 PPrecautioris tree dutta eas 87 Data Format IE te DAG qiiid e 87 Example of communications with rand
4. Ethernet equipped module Send data Data Header Receive data 1 Not matched e Header Data mms External device Receive packet ted ket Discarded Data Receive data 2 i Matched Header Data Sixteen receive packets can be specified Bc Received The operation image of Send amp Receive is shown below MWhen the instruction completed successfully ECPRTCL instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Waiting time to send Waiting time to receive Ethernet equipped module Send packet 4 Receive data The receive data matched the receive packet expected packet External device Send packet Receive data APPENDICES APPENDIX 233 Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol When the instruction completed with an error timeout error at sending ECPRTCL instruction K An error has occurred Completion device K The device turns on F 4 upon abnormal end Completion device 1 t TCP ULP timer Ethernet equipped module Send packet The packet cannot be sent or no response is Discarded received from the External device external device Receive data When the instruction completed w
5. Remote Control Remote Run 1001 0000 Executes the remote RUN to the access destination module Remote Stop 1002 0000 Executes the remote STOP to the access destination module Remote Pause 1003 0000 Executes the remote PAUSE to the access destination module Remote Latch 1005 0000 Executes the Remote Latch Clear to the access destination module Clear Remote Reset 1006 0000 Executes the Remote RESET to the access destination module Read Type Name 0101 0000 Reads the model name and model code of the access destination module Remote Lock 1631 0000 Specifies the remote password to disable the communication with other devices Password The locked state is activated from the unlocked state Unlock 1630 0000 Specifies the remote password to enable communication with other devices The unlocked state is activated from the locked state File Read Directory 1810 0040 Reads file list information File Search Directory 1811 0040 Reads the presence of the specified file file No and file size File New File 1820 0040 Reserves storage area for the specified file Delete File 1822 0040 Deletes a file Copy File 1824 0040 Copies the specified file Change File 1825 0040 Changes file attributes State Change File Date 1826 0040 Changes the file creation date Open File 1827 0040 Locks a file so that the content of the file is not changed by other devices Read File 1828 0000 Reads the data of a file
6. Default router IP address Default router IP address The IP address in the parameter file is set When using the IP address change function Parameter file 3 Module parameter ped 8 CPU module E IP address 192 168 3 39 s Subnet mask pattern 255 255 255 0 IP eens iI Default router IP address 192 168 3 254 Subnet mask pattern 255 255 255 0 Default router IP address 192 168 3 254 IP address storage area system memory IP address 192 168 3 40 The IP address in the IP address storage area system memory is set Subnet mask pattern 255 255 255 0 Default router IP address 192 168 3 254 1 FUNCTIONS 119 1 11 Address Change Function Writing and clearing the IP address The IP address value is written into the IP address storage area system memory The write and clear operations are performed with the special relay and special register IP address storage area Special register system memory address address 501521 501522 Subnet mask Subnet mask 501523 pattern pattern 501524 Default router Write execution Default router SD1525 IP address SM1520 ON IP address Usage methods Write operation Execute writing by storing the IP address to be changed in SD1520 to SD1525 IP address setting and turning off and on 5 15
7. 15 5 Searching modules the network 19 Send frame 131 SLMP died eb oti Pha Sav es 15 SLMP 26 Socket communications instructions 217 Socket fixed buffer reception status signal 215 Station 125 Status for each protocol 208 Status of each connection 155 Status of each 156 Structure of the module label 188 Subnet address 139 Subnet mask 15 Subnet mask 146 Table conversion 144 Transient transmission group number 15 125 U Unlock 55 116 5 55 aa ao 222 243 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover June 2014 SH NA 081257ENG A First edition July 2014 SH NA 081257ENG B Error correction November 2014 SH NA 081257ENG C Added or modified parts Section 2 2 3 1 3 2 3 5 3 7 Appendix 1 2 April 2015 SH NA 081257ENG D WAdded models RO8PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU WAdded or modified parts Section 1 3 1 5 2 3 3 5 Appendix 2 4 11 Japanese manual number SH 081253 D This manual confers no industrial property rights of an
8. APPENDICES APPENDIX 23 Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 5 Example of packet element data The element processing procedures that can be set for the packets the actual data examples and others are shown below Length llProcess procedure The Ethernet equipped module processes the length with the following procedure During send Data flow Forward direction Sendin ing External device 30H 31H 3210 0123 32H 33H 32H 31H 30H Length calculating result 33H 123H Reverse direction Conversion to 33H ASCII 32H 0123 L gt 3210 hexadecimal 31H 30H 31H 32H 33H 0 30H 30H 1 31 2420 3 33H 31H 30H gt 2301 1032 33H 32H 33H 30H 31H 32H During receive Data flow Forward direction Length calculation result 30H Conversion from ASCII hexadecimal to binary 31H 0123 m 123H 32H 33H External device Sending Reverse direction 33H 10123 gt 32H 33H 32H 31H 30H gt 3210 m 3210H 30H Byte swap 31H 30H gt 1032 m 1032H 33H 32H 236 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 9 Operation
9. mer i E pal Ross 36 Execution conditions of predefined protocol 41 Example of predefined protocol communications 1 43 1 4 Socket Communications 263 2 0608 coe buceo m e erede wa e ed UTE BUE RR eee 52 Setting procedure tay en ege rues seb oret ee Ri ERA EA KU XE Rae Dae 52 Applicable dedicated instructions 21 4 53 Applicable Connections iua dre pese dues Ra un exe ue red ani PES va Ache ec REE id oe 53 Communication 54 Communicatioris using TCP IP Srur Legen hmmm ids mp S epe RR x ea PA Y Y Re Rd 55 Communications using 58 Broadcast commiunications 2 a E OP DECR UE ele o ponis 59 Precautloris zo d oe ELSE PIE id esee dues ed bn mae aie LE ids d 59 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed 60 Differences between the Procedure Exist and No Procedure control 0 60 Setting procedure cese eec TR RO RH Rod eR oS RC ol oe 60 Applicable dedicated instructions
10. D978 D978 Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Network No D979 D979 Fixed Length 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Station No D 380 DS80 fFixed Lenath 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Requested module 1 0 No 0981 0381 Fixed Length 2B yte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data For future expansion 00 1 Byte Static Data Command 0104 28 yte Static Data Subcommand Change Type Add New Paste Delete 0000 28 pte 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 47 48 12 Write the protocol setting data to the CPU module XZ Online gt Write to Module Target Module Selection Module Selection 0000 8771 71 Target Memory ceu Built in Memory 7 Please save the protocol setting because the data to be written to target memory does not include the following information Non written Data in Target Memory Manufacturer Packet Name Protocol Detailed Setting Type Version Explanation Packet Setting Configuration Element Name 13 write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system XZ Online Write to PLC Point In this example default values were used for parameters that are not shown above For the pa
11. password valid range The remote password is valid only for access from the Ethernet equipped module for which the parameters are set When using multiple CPU modules in a multi CPU system set a remote password for each CPU module for requiring a remote password Ethernet i Remote password M i remote password i The remote password is checked when accessing with path A or B The remote password is not checked when accessing with path C or D Connection for nonprocedural fixed buffer communication The remote password is not checked during communication for nonprocedural fixed buffer communication so do not set the remote password check Accessing another station s programmable controller When the external device is accessing another station s programmable controller via the Ethernet equipped module it may not be possible to access the programmable controller if a remote password is set for the CPU module at the relay station or access station 118 1 FUNCTIONS 1 10 Security Function 1 11 IP Address Change Function This function can store the special relay and special register values to change the CPU module IP address without changing the parameter settings Store the IP address of the special register SD to the IP address storage area system memory by turning the spec
12. Installation Precautions NCAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the Safety Guidelines included with the base unit Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount a module place the concave part s located at the bottom onto the guide s of the base unit and push in the module until the hook s located at the top snaps into place Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction When using an extension cable connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely Check the connection for looseness Poor contact may cause malfunction When using an SD memory card fully insert it into the SD memory card slot Check that it is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Securely insert an extended SRAM cassette into the cassette connector of the CPU module After insertion close the cassette cover and check that the cassette is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction
13. Station module RJ71EN71 Network No 1 Ethernet Station 1 1 Station 3 2 1 Remote Remote Remote Remote password password password password Uc nt check Station Engineering tool CPU module RJ71EN71 RJ71EN71 CPU module RJ71EN71 Ethernet Ethernet Network No 2 Network No 3 Station 2 1 1 Station 2 2 1 2 Station 3 1 1 Remote Remote password password CEU RJ71EN71 1 check _ module RY71EN71 Station CPU module RJ71EN71 RJ71EN71 Station D The password can be unlocked and locked by the following external devices 1 1 station 1 A station only 2 2 station 1 C station only 3 2 station 1 D station only Station accessible from external device after remote password is unlocked Station accessible from external device even if remote password is not unlocked Station that cannot be accessed from external device A station O A o x x x B station A A A x x x C station A A A O O x D station A A A A A 2 station can access the station after the remote password for 1 1 station 1 is unlocked The A station can be accessed if the communication line is open The B station can access the A station if the communication line is open The C station can access the O station after the remote password for 2 2 station 1 is unlocked
14. MUDP packet Un G5120 to Un G5125 The UDP status is counted in the range of 0 to 4294967295 FFFFFFFH Un G5120 to Un G5121 Received packet total count Un G5122 to Un G5123 Received packet checksum error discard count Un G5124 to Un G5125 Sent packet total count HReceiving error Un G5160 to Un G5165 The receive error status is counted in the range of 0 to 4294967295 FFFFFFFH Un G5160 to Un G5161 Framing error count Un G5162 to Un G5163 Receive FIFO overflow count Un G5164 to Un G5165 CRC error count APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory on status storage area BLED status Un G5189 Un G5189 Stores the on off status of the P ERR LED 0 Off 1 On or flashing llHub connection status area Un G5191 to Un G5194 The hub connection status of the Ethernet equipped module is stored Un G5191 Communication mode Stores the communication mode 0 Half duplex 1 Full duplex Un G5192 Connection status Stores the connection status 0 Hub is not connected or disconnected 1 Hub connected Un G5193 Communication speed Stores the communication speed 0 Operating at 1OBASE T 1 Operating at 100BASE TX 2 Operating at 1000BASE T Un G5194 Disconnection count Stores the number of times the cable was disconnected IP address duplication status storage area Un G5200 to Un G5206 Information when IP address is duplicated is stored
15. Un G4 First octet second octet Un G5 Third octet fourth octet Subnet mask Un G14 to Un G15 The subnet mask set with the module parameter is stored Un G14 First octet second octet Un G15 Third octet fourth octet Default gateway IP address Un G18 to Un G19 The default gateway IP address set with the module parameter is stored Un G18 First octet second octet Un G19 Third octet fourth octet MOwn node MAC address Un G28 to Un G30 The MAC address of the Ethernet equipped module is stored Un G28 5th byte 6th byte of the MAC address Un G29 3rd byte 4th byte of the MAC address Un G30 1st byte 2nd byte of the MAC address Jumbo frame setting Un G35 Un G35 Stores the jumbo frame set with the module parameter Disable MTU 1500 byte 2KB MTU 2034 byte 3KB MTU 3058 byte 4KB MTU 4082 byte 5KB MTU 5106 byte 6KB MTU 6130 byte 7KB MTU 7154 byte 8KB MTU 8178 byte 9KB MTU 9004 byte sh OO ES O speed setting Un G36 Un G36 Stores the communication speed set with the module parameter 0 Automatic negotiation 1 10Mbps half duplex 2 10Mbps full duplex 3 100Mbps half duplex 4 100Mbps full duplex 6 1Gbps full duplex APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 207 208 orage area Connection No 1 latest error code to connection No 64 latest error code Un G100 to Un G163 The latest
16. not be executed depending on the file type Page 101 Files that can be transferred with FTP 2 If executed the process completes abnormally 3 Shows the Allow Online Change setting in FTP Server Setting under Application Settings If an illegal command is executed while write is prohibited during RUN the process completes abnormally 4 Shows whether the command can be executed when the FTP communication port is specified as a remote password check target port with the Ethernet equipped module mounted station s remote password setting For details on the remote password refer to the following Page 114 Remote password 5 The Ethernet equipped module is set to transfer the file automatically without conversion Binary code fixed Therefore the file is transferred with binary code regardless of the Communication Data Code setting in Own Node Settings under Basic Settings 6 The parameter file and program file cannot be deleted when the CPU module is in the RUN state 7 Only the subcommands dedicated for the Ethernet equipped module can be used For the subcommands can be used refer to the following Page 103 Subcommands usable with quote command 1 02 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server llSubcommands usable with quote command This section describes the Ethernet equipped module dedicated commands added to the quote command and used When executing this command from the FTP client input th
17. Point The IP filter function is one method of preventing illegal access such as program or data destruction from an external device It does not completely prevent illegal access Incorporate measures other than this function if the programmable controller system s safety must be maintained against illegal access from an external device Mitsubishi shall not be held liable for any system problems that may occur from illegal access Examples of measures for illegal access are given below Install a firewall Install a personal computer as a relay station and control the relay of send receive data with an application program Install an external device for which the access rights can be controlled as a relay station Contact the network provider or equipment dealer for details on the external devices for which access rights can be controlled 1 FUNCTIONS 1 10 Security Function 1 1 3 Setting procedure 1 Set the IP address for the IP address to be passed or blocked in Security under Application Settings Page 138 IP Filter Settings 2 Write the module parameters to the CPU module 3 The IP filter function is enabled when the CPU module power is turned off and on or reset Point Even if the connection is established as set with the Ethernet equipped module s External Device Configuration or the program access from the external device is either passed or blocked following the IP filter settings Theref
18. 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user Onerous repair term after discontinuation
19. 501526 Operation at abnormal completion Write start Write failed Write start Write completed Write request 5 1520 Y 1 Wee Tre gem SM1521 railed Write error cause Error cause 0 501526 Cause of error at abnormal completion If the data is not written correctly into the IP address storage area system memory the cause of the error is stored in SD1526 IP address storage area writing error cause 100H The SD1520 to SD1525 IP address setting value exceeds the setting range 200H An error occurred during write 400H Writing was started during the clear processing aring operation Execute clearing by turning off and on SM1522 IP address storage area clear request Operations 1 Turn SM1522 IP address storage area clear request 2 Check the write results with the following special relays and special registers 5 1522 IP address storage area clear request Off Off 5 1523 IP address storage area clear error Off On SD1527 IP address storage area clear error Stores the cause of the error cause 3 Power off and on or set the CPU module 4 Checkthe IP address with the buffer memory lt Page 197 CPU module 1 FUNCTIONS 121 1 11 IP Address Change Function Operation of special relays and special registers
20. Function Sets the read password file password registered as the file transfer target file to the Ethernet equipped module Shows clears the read password set in FTP Use this command only when a read password is registered for the file transfer target file The CPU module checks the password when accessing the specified file Specification format quote passwd rd read password The following appears as the execution results when the command ends normally When setting a read password 200 Command successful When displaying the read password 200 Read password is read password When clearing the read password 200 Command successful When displaying the state with a read password not set 200 Read password is not set Example 1 When specifying the read password ABCD1234 efgh quote passwd rd ABCD1234 efgh Example 2 When displaying the read password currently set in FTP quote passwd rd Example 3 When clearing the read password currently set in FTP quote passwd rd c or quote passwd rd C Caution One read password can be set for the Ethernet equipped module s FTP When the file transfer target file changes and when a read password is registered for the change destination file reset the read password for the target file The read password is initialized cleared when logging into the Ethernet equipped module 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server 107 passwd wr Function
21. I Page 126 IP Address 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 Default Blank Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask pattern of the default gateway when setting the IP address of the default gateway and communicating with an external device on another network via a router All the devices on a subnetwork must have the same subnet mask This setting is not required when communicating in single network Blank 0 0 0 1 to 255 255 255 255 Default Blank Default Gateway Set the IP address of the default gateway the device which the own node passes through to access a device of another network Set the value that satisfies the following conditions The IP address class is any of A B and C The subnet address of the default gateway is the same as that of the Ethernet equipped module on the own station host address bits are not all or all 1 Blank 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 Default Blank Communications by Network No Station No Select Enable to set the network number station number and transient transmission group number This setting is not required when the following functions are not used Connection with the MELSOFT products and the GOT when connecting by specifying the network number and station number Communications using SLMP when specifying the target station with its network number and station number Communications using the link dedicated instruction Commu
22. L H L 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 39H 41H 42H 43H Random access buffer Physical address L Logical address 20021 56H 78H 21 20022 9AH BCH 22 20029 9AH BCH 29 n 26143 6143 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer 95 96 Example of communications with random access buffer The following figure shows an example of the write operation from the external device External device erg CPU module GE RJAAENTT1 cs Random access buffer Device memory D10000 121710 Data received Data received i 121719 D10009 i 121720 1 i T t0 lt Program for receive processing 000217200 UO N G21710 D10000 e The receive completion flag is set at the end of the received data The receive completion flag is monitored When the receive completion flag turns on the data is transferred from the random access buffer to the CPU module 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer Receive completion flag 1 7 Dedicated Instruction Communication The link dedicated instructions are used to exchange random data between another network or other station s CPU module connected to
23. Parameter information Parameter type No Parameter No Network No Station No 2250H The protocol setting data stored in the CPU module is not Write the protocol setting data for the Ethernet equipped Parameter information for the Ethernet equipped module module to the CPU module Parameter type 24COH An error was detected on the system bus Take measures to reduce noise System configuration Reset the CPU module and run it again If the error information occurs again even after taking the above the possible No cause is a hardware failure of the module base unit or Base No extension cable Please consult your local Mitsubishi Slot No representative CPU No 24C1H An error was detected on the system bus Take measures to reduce noise System configuration Reset the CPU module and run it again If the error information occurs again even after taking the above the possible No cause is a hardware failure of the module base unit or Base No extension cable Please consult your local Mitsubishi Slot No representative CPU No 24C2H An error was detected on the system bus Take measures to reduce noise System configuration Reset the CPU module and run it again If the error information occurs again even after taking the above the possible No cause is a hardware failure of the module base unit or Base No extension cable
24. Please save in the protocol setting file because the data to be written to target memory does not include the following information Protocol Detailed Setting Type Version Explanation Configuration Element Name 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 33 34 The following data is not written as the protocol setting data so it will not be displayed even when read However when the protocol is selected from the predefined protocol library the following can be displayed Manufacturer Packet name Type version and explanation in the protocol detailed setting Element name in packet settings When the predefined protocol settings are written into multiple target memories the following operation will take place When written into both the CPU module memory and SD memory card Operation follows settings in Memory Card Parameter When written in the CPU module memory or SD memory and the RJ71ENT71 The predefined protocol settings in the CPU module memory or SD memory card are enabled at the following timing When written into both the CPU module memory and SD memory card operation follows the settings in Memory Card Parameter As soon as the settings are disabled the RJ71EN71 predefined protocol settings are overwritten by the predefined protocol settings in the CPU module or SD memory card When the system is powered off and on When the CPU module is reset When
25. Send receive is possible with one connection Specify send or receive for one connection Two connections are required for send and receive Restriction The CPU module cannot exchange data with the fixed buffer Differences between the Procedure Exist and No Procedure control methods Procedure Exist and No Procedure control methods can be used for fixed buffer communication The following table lists the differences between Procedure Exist and No Procedure Message format Data is sent and received with the predetermined data format Data is sent and received according to the external device s message format Response for received data A response is sent for the received data No response is sent for the received data Data Code Data length specified with dedicated instructions Data can be exchanged with binary code or ASCII code Specify with a number of words Data is exchanged only with binary codes Specify with a number of bytes Amount of application data per data exchange session Maximum 5113 words binary code Maximum 2556 words ASCII code Maximum 10238 bytes 1 The following value is used if the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Compatible Ethernet Procedure Exist Maximum 1017 words binary code maximum 508 words ASCII code No Procedure Maximum 2046 bytes Setting procedure Set External Device Configuration under Basi
26. Divided messages receive timeout error Not all the data could be received within the response monitoring timer value Sufficient data for the data length could not be received The remaining part of the message divided at the TCP IP level could not be received within the response monitoring timer value IP assembly timeout error An IP assembly timeout error has occurred The remaining part of the divided data could not be received and a timeout has occurred TCP specification port number error The port number used in a connection already opened is set For TCP IP UDP specification port number error The port number used in a connection already opened is set For UDP IP Access abnormal response of another station Abnormal response was returned from another station when accessing another station Abnormal response was returned to another station when accessed from another station Fixed buffer response send failed Response send of the communications using a fixed buffer has failed Pairing open error The open processing of the connection specified for pairing open has been already completed End code error An abnormal end response was received for communications using a fixed buffer and random access buffer Response monitoring timeout error Aresponse could not be received within the response monitoring timer value The connection with the external device was close
27. Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module SD memory card extended SRAM cassette or connector Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions NWARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before installation and wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction After installation and wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions CAUTION Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Check the rated voltage and signal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause fire or failure Connectors for external devices must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer or must be correctly soldered Incomplete connections may cause short circuit fire or malfunction Securely connec
28. IP Address Port No Subnet Mask Gateway TCP Receive 192 0 1 101 4096 5 Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system XZ Online gt Write to PLC In this example default values were used for parameters that are not shown above For the parameter setting refer to the chapter explaining the parameters in this manual 27 Page 124 PARAMETER SETTINGS 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Module label RCPU stSM bAlways_ON Always on SM400 EN71_EE_1 bnCompletion_ConnectionOpen 1 Open completion signal connection No 1 U01G1900000 0 EN71 EE 1 bnStatus ConnectionOpenExecution 1 Open request signal connection No 1 U01G1900008 0 EN71 EE 1 uCompletion Ethernetlnitialized O Initial status U01G1900024 0 Label to be defined Define global labels as shown below Label Name Data Type Class Assign Device Labe bRunRefresh i 22 4 0 bStapen Bt r m bRunOpen t OK m bOpen NG 3 A j vaanaoma M bStatSend GLOBAL V bRunSend i bSend OK bSend NG bStartClose bRunClose bClose_OK i bClose NG Bt v bStatOpenFB Bit 7 VaR Word U
29. Network No 1 Station No 11 IP Address 192 0 1 11 Ethernet Network No 1 CPU RJ71 RJ71 module EN71 EN71 3 Communication relay sending station oz zi 2 9 S CPU RJ71 Network No 2 module EN71 Station No 22 IP Address 192 0 2 22 4 Communication request destination station a For communication request message transmission b For response message transmission Item Setting details of each Ethernet equipped module when accessing from 1 to 2 1 Communication request source 2 3 4 station a Setting value Network number station number 1 12 Setting not required Setting not required Setting not required decimal IP Address 192 0 1 12 Item Setting details of each Ethernet equipped module when accessing from 1 to 4 1 Communication request source 2 Communication relay receiving 3 Communication relay sending 4 Communication request destination station a station b station a station b Setting value Network number station number 1 12 1 11 2 22 2 21 decimal IP Address 192 0 1 12 192 0 1 11 192 0 2 22 192 0 2 21 Setting details of each Ethernet equipped module when accessing from 2 to 1 1 2 Communication 3 4 request destination station a Setting value Network number station number Setting
30. Predefined protocol ready a Un G1901002 0 Predefined protocol setting data check area The error details are stored Un G1901020 to Un G1901047 When executing UINI instruction When the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet and the UINI instruction is executed the protocol setting data will not be checked Predefined protocol ready maintains the state before the UINI instruction was executed 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Example of predefined protocol communications This section describes an example of predefined protocol communications using UCP IP System configuration Sending side Receiving side 192 0 1 100 192 0 1 101 GX Works3 Ethernet Parameter settings Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module and set the parameters Sending side 1 Set the CPU module in the following item XZ Project gt New Series di Ropu Type Program Language a Ladder 2 Click the Yes button to add the module labels of the CPU module you want to add the module label of the following installed j modules z Module Name RO4CPU Start 1 0 3E00 Do Not Show this Dialog Again This setting can be changed in the Options dialog 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol
31. Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module and do not insert remove the extended SRAM cassette to from the CPU module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction After the first use of the product do not insert remove the SD memory card to from the CPU module more than 500 times Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction Do not touch the metal terminals on the back side of the SD memory card Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module Do not touch the integrated circuits on the circuit board of an extended SRAM cassette Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it dispose of it without using Startup and maintenance of a control panel must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock Lock t
32. Un G1900008 0 SYN ACK FIN ACK 11 le 11 SYN ACK FIN ACK After the module parameters are set checks that the initial processing for the Ethernet equipped module has completed normally Initial status Un G1900024 0 On When the initial processing completes normally the connection enters the open enable state and the module waits for the open request from the external device The Ethernet equipped module executes the open processing when an open request SYN is received from the external device When the open processing ends normally Open completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 turns on and data communication is enabled The Ethernet equipped module executes the close processing when the close request FIN is received from the external device When the close processing completes normally the open completion signal turns off and data communication is disabled After the internal processing in the Ethernet equipped module completes the connection stands by for the open request again 1 open request SYN received between the initial processing normal completion to the open request standby state is handled as an error and the Ethernet equipped module sends a connection forced close RST to the external device that sent the open request SYN aaa When the open close processing is executed with a dedicated instruction from the Ethernet equipped module even if Do Not Open by Program
33. Write File 1829 0000 Writes the contents in a file Close File 182A 0000 Cancels the file lock by open processing Self Test 0619 0000 Tests whether the communication with external devices is normally executed or not 1 FUNCTIONS 2 1 2 SLMP Communications 7 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Data can be exchanged between the external device such as measuring instrument and bar code reader and the CPU module following the protocol of the device Data that varies according to communication session can be handled by incorporating a device or buffer memory into the communication packet Sets the protocol required for communication with the external device using the engineering tool The protocol can be set by selecting from the predefined protocol library or it can be created and edited Setting protocols Writing protocols Protocols can be set easily using the predefined Write the set protocols in the Ethernet equipped module protocol support function of GX Works3 GX Works3 Sending External device External device Ethernet equipped module Receiving TAE Executing protocols Data can be communicated with protocols appropriate to each external device Execute protocols by dedicated instructions Multiple protocols can be executed by one dedicated instr
34. 195 196 26144 to 65534 6620H to FFFEH System area 2026144 to 1EEAAOH to 2065534 1F847EH 65535 FFFFH Network type Network type information 2065535 1F847FH information area 65536 10000H Area for communication Fixed buffer No 1 Data length 655371070655 10001H to 113FFH Using a fixed buffer Fixed buffer data 70656 to 147455 11400H to 23FFFH Fixed buffer No 2 to Fixed buffer No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 147456 to 24000H to 1899999 1CFDDFH 2147456 to 20C480H to 3899999 3B825FH System area 1 2 common area 1900000 to 1CFDEOH to Ethernet PORT 1 2 Open completion signal 1900007 1CFDE7H common information 1900008 to 1CFDE8H to Open request signal 1900015 1CFDEFH 1900016 to 1CFDFOH to Socket fixed buffer reception status signal 1900023 1CFDF7H 1900024 1CFDF8H Initial status 1900025 1CFDF9H Initial error code 1900026 to 1CFDFAH to System area 1901001 1D01C9H 1901002 1D01CAH Predefined protocol Predefined protocol ready support function check area 1901003 to 1D01CBH to System area 1901019 1D01DBH 1901020 1D01DCH Predefined protocol Predefined protocol setting data error Protocol number setting data check area information 1901021 1D01DDH Setting type 1901022 1D01DEH Packet number 1901023 1D01DFH Element number 1901024 1D01E0H Number of registered pr
35. 37H 38H H to D to L MEnd code The error code is stored the end command added to the response Page 186 End Codes Returned to an External Device During Data Communications 1 FUNCTIONS 91 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer Example of command response format The following section shows an example of the command and response format iIWriting to buffer with write request from external device When exchanging data with binary codes Command format external device RJ71EN71 Subheader Start address Data length Text 10 words L H D H D H D H D L _ 62H OOH OOH OAH OOH 34H 12H 78H 56H BCH 9 BCH 9AH ee Random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 20000 12H 34H 0 20001 56H 78H 1 gt 20002 BCH 2 tT 20009 9AH BCH 9 1 10 words 26143 6143 Response format RJ71EN71 external device Subheader End code E2H 00H 92 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer When exchanging data with ASCII codes Command format external device gt RJ71EN71 Subheader Start address Data length H 5 D 36H 32H OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH 41H Text 20 words H L 0 L H D at 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H eem 39H
36. 43 3 Set the RJ71EN71 in the following item 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Right click Add New Module Module Selection Module Information Module Viodule Name RJ7LEN71 E E Port 1 Network Type Ethernet Port 1 Station Type Port 2 Network Type Ethernet Port 2 Station Type Advanced Settings Mounting Position Mounting Base Main Base Mounting Slot No 0 Start I O No Specification Not Set Start VO No 0000 H Number of Occupied Points per 1 Sh 32 Points 4 Click the Yes button to add a module label of the RJ71EN71 Do you want to add the module label of the following installed modules Module Name RJ71bEN71 E4E Start 1 0 No 0000 7 Do Not Show this Dialog Again This setting can be changed in the Options dialog Cove io 5 Set the Basic Settings in the following item 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt RJ71EN71 Port 1 Module Parameter Ethernet gt Basic Settings Setting Enable Disable Online Change Disable All SLMP Communication Data Code Binary Opening Method Do Not Open by Program Detailed Setting 4 4 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 6 Set the network configuration in the following item XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt RJ71EN71 gt Port 1 Module Parameter Ethernet gt Ba
37. CLOSE instruction completion device Abnormally CLOSE instruction ended completion device 1 Open completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 Open request signal connection No 1 Un G1900008 0 SYN ACK FIN ACK e 1 2 SYN ACK FIN ACK After the module parameters are set checks that the initial processing for the Ethernet equipped module has completed normally Initial status Un G1900024 0 On Start the open processing using the OPEN instruction Open request signal connection No 1 Un G1900008 0 On The Ethernet equipped module executes the open processing The module sends open request SYN to the external device Data be exchanged after the open processing completes normally Start the close processing using the CLOSE instruction Open request signal connection No 1 Un G1900008 0 Off Q The Ethernet equipped module executes the close processing The module sends close request FIN to external device Data communication ends when close processing completes normally 2 1 If RST is returned from the external device after SYN is sent from the Ethernet equipped module open abnormal completion occurs immediately and the open processing ends 2 If ACK or FIN is not returned even after the TCP end timer time the Ethernet equipped module forcibly cuts off the connection sends RST Close abnormal completion APPENDIC
38. Communication Communication Latest Connection No Host Station Destination Destination Destination Error Protocol ue Function Part No Communication IP Address Port No Code Status 1 MELSOFT Connection Disconnected 2 4 MELSOFT Connection x GEH 5 MELSOFT Connection TCP pee m 6 1 MELSOFT Connection Disconnected 7 MELSOFT Connection Disconnected 8 MELSOFT Connection Disconnected 9 E MELSOFT Connection Disconnected 10 _ MELSOFT Connection Disconnected 11 MELSOFT Connection Disconnected 12 MELSOFT Connection 13 MELSOFT Connection Disconnected O 3 MELSOFT Connection TCP Disconnected MELSOFT Connection 1 Disconnected 17 MELSOFT Connection Te Disconnected 188 MELSOFT Connection Disconnected 19 MELSOFT Connection _ Disconnected MESOFT Connection TT PING Test Communication Status Test The following table lists the displayed items in Status of Each Connection tab Connection No Function Displays the connection number and functions FTP server MELSOF direct connection Host Station Port No Displays the own station port number used Communication Destination Displays the communication method
39. Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C44EH A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module 180 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes C44FH A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C610H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C611H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C612H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status te
40. For example when the TCP resend timer value is set to 10 seconds and the TCP ULP timer value is set to 30 seconds data will be resend every 10 seconds if no response is returned from the external device after data sending and timeout error occurs if no response is returned within 30 seconds Unit s 1 to 16383 Unit ms 100 to 16383000 Default 30s TCP End Timer When closing the TCP IP connection by the own station set the monitoring time for waiting for a FIN from the external device after the own station sends a FIN and an ACK is returned from the external device If a FIN is not received from the external device within the time specified by the TCP end timer value an RST is sent to the external device and the connection is forcibly closed Unit s 1 to 16383 Unit ms 100 to 16383000 Default 20s sent due to the buffer limitation of the sending station or the receiving station Set the waiting time for the divided data in such a case TCP Zero Window Timer Set the receive buffer value on the receive side If the receive buffer on Unit s 1 to 16383 the receive side has no free space window size 0 data sending is Unit ms 100 to 16383000 waited until the receive side has free receive buffer space At this time Default 10s the sending side sends packets for checking the send window to the receive side according to the TCP zero window timer value to check the receiving status
41. If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Rewrite the module parameter using the engineering tool If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 4000H to 4FFFH Errors detected by the CPU module LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application C001H The IP address setting value of the E71 for the initial processing is incorrect The setting value of the subnet mask field for the router relay function is incorrect Correct the IP address setting value for the initial processing Check if the class of the IP address is set to A B C Correct the subnet mask setting value for the initial processing C012H The port number used in a connection already opened is set For TCP IP Correct the port numbers of the Ethernet equipped module and the external device C013H The port number used in a connection already opened is set For UDP IP Correct the port numbers of the Ethernet equipped module and the external device 015 The IP address setting value of the external device for the open processing is incorrect Correct the specified IP address of the external device of the CONOPEN OPEN instruction Set the class to A B C 016 The open processi
42. M20 EN71 EE IRE K6 uSendDat bStartSe TbnComp Ad letion Co a 0 nnection 1 5 1 1 1000 1234 uSendDat al MOVP D1001 5678 uSendDat 2 1002 8901 uSendDat a 3 MOVP D1003 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 322 EN71 EE 1 bnComp pStarise letion Co nnection Open 1 M5 memo mne EN71_EE1 H i H 01000 K 393 uSendData M7 B i_bEN DUT i_stModule UW _uConnectionNo UW _uSendData bRunSen d o bOKB bSend N G o bErcB M8 uSendEr o_uErrid UW bSend N G M8 396 EN71_EE_ 1 bnComp bStartClo letion Co nnection 1 M13 EN71 EE 1 7 t bEN stModule UW i uConnectionNo pbo uErrConn No 0 bRunClos e o bENO B bClose O K o bOKB o bErrB uCloseE o uErdd UW 1 FUNCTIONS 8 1 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 82 bStartClo bClose O se K 512 RST M15 UE M13 bClose N G M16 I 515 J i 0 The refresh processing of the module label is performed The processing is required for when using the module function block When the refresh processing is completed bRunRefresh MO is turned on 68 When bStartOpen M1 is turn
43. Sets the write password file password registered in the file transfer target file to the Ethernet equipped module Shows clears the write password set in FTP Use this command only when a write password is registered for the file transfer target file The CPU module checks the password when accessing the specified file Specification format quote passwd wr write password The following appears as the execution results when the command ends normally When setting the write password 200 Command successful When displaying the write password 200 Write password is Write password When clearing the write password 200 Command successful When displaying the state with the write password not set 200 Write password is not set Example 1 When specifying the write password ABCD1234 efgh quote passwd wr ABCD1234 efgh Example 2 When displaying the write password currently set in the FTP quote passwd wr Example 3 When clearing the write password currently set in the FTP quote passwd wr c or quote passwd wr C Caution One write password can be set for the Ethernet equipped module s FTP When the file transfer target file changes and when a write password is registered for the change destination file reset the write password for the target file The write password is initialized cleared when logging into the Ethernet equipped module password unlock Function Specifies the remote password set for the CPU module and u
44. Since UDP IP communications does not establish a connection during communication and does not check that the communication destination has correctly received the data the line load is lower Note that the data reliability is lower than TCP IP communications Communication flow UDP IP communications does not require a process to establish a connection with the external device as is required with TCP IP communications Ethernet equipped module External device The client opens Open Open the port Data sending Datz sendind request The client specifies 9 req the destination and sends data to it The server requests data reception and Receive processing reading reads the received data Data sending Data sending request Receive processing reading The client performs Close Close the close processing Point Wait at least 500ms or more before executing the open processing again after the close request is sent from the external device to the Ethernet equipped module Open procedure The open close processing procedure is as follows according to the setting of Opening Method under Own Node Settings in Basic Settings 125 Own Node Settings When Do Not Open by Program is set After the Ethernet equipped module mounted station starts
45. Since the close processing is in execution using the Do no perform the send processing during the close CONCLOSE CLOSE instruction a send request cannot processing be accepted COCAH The UINI instruction has been executed during Execute the UINI instruction after closing all connections communications CODOH The specified data length of the link dedicated instruction Correct the data length is incorrect COD1H The number of resends of the link dedicated instruction is Correct the number of resends incorrect 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 175 COD3H The number of relay stations to communicate with other networks exceeds the allowable range Check if the specification network number station number for the communication destination is correct Check that number of relay stations accessing to the communication destination is 7 or less Correct the settings in the Network station number lt gt IP information for the stations between the own station and the communication destination CODA4H The number of relay stations to communicate with other Check if the specification network number station networks exceeds the allowable range number for the communication destination is correct Check that number of relay stations accessing to the communication destination is 7 or less Correct the settings in the Network s
46. Specification format Is drive name Example When displaying the detailed information of files stored in the data memory Is 4 Similar command dir 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server mdelete Function Deletes files stored in the CPU module When deleting multiple files specify the file name and extension in the file path name with wild cards Specification format mdelete file path name abbreviated mdel Example When deleting all files with CSV extension from files stored in SD memory card mdelete 2 CSV Similar command delete mdir Function Stores the detailed information file name date of creation volume of the file stored in the CPU module in the FTP client side file as log data Specification format mdir source drive name destination file path name Example When storing the detailed information of file stored in data memory into 20120702 LOG file mdir 4 20120702 LOG Caution Always specify immediately after the source drive name Always specify the source drive name when specifying the destination file path name FTP client side If the destination file path name is not specified the file is stored with the file name determined by the FTP client s FTP application transfer destination is in the currently connected directly when FTP is started and connected Similar command mls mget Function Reads a file from the
47. The following figure shows the operation of the special relays and special registers when clearing the IP address storage area system memory Operation at normal completion The system is powered off when clearing was completed Clear start Clear completed Clear request ON SM1522 1 i Clear error ON i SM1523 OFF r i 1 1 Clear error cause 4 0 501527 Operation at abnormal completion Clear start Clear failed Clear start Clear completed Clear request 2 __ 5 1522 Y 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 failed The system is powered off when clearing starts Clear error cause b wd Error cause SD1527 Clear error ON The 1 is powered SM1523 9n when clearing was 2 i i i llCause of error at abnormal completion If the IP address storage area system memory is not cleared correctly the error cause is stored in SD1527 IP address storage area clear error cause SD1527 value Cause of error 200H Error occurred during clearing 400H Clearing was started during the write processing Checking the IP address The CPU module IP address can be checked with the buffer memory Own node IP address Un G50 to Un G51 Subnet mask Un G60 to Un G61 Default gateway IP address Un G64 to Un G65 Precautions Th
48. Total Number of Echo Reply Sends Displays the total number of sent ICMP echo replay packets 0 to 4294967295 Total Number of Echo Request Sends Displays the total number of sent ICMP echo request packets 0 to 4294967295 Total Number of Echo Reply Receives Displays the total number of received ICMP echo reply packets 0 to 4294967295 156 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 3 Checking the Network Status BING Test Target Module Specification ode no Status of Each Connection Status of Each Protocol Change IP Address Display Change Port No Display Address 0000 PLCNo 1 DEC HEX Communication Status Test Communication Status Full Duplex Half Duplex Full Duplex Connection Status Connecting Communication Rate 10008ASE TX Number of Disconnections 0 Broadcast Maximum Size of Detection 174 Byte Amount of Data per Unit Time Latest 0 Byte Sec Amount of Data per Unit Time Maximum 174 Byte Sec The following table lists the displayed items in Connection Status tab Communication Status Full Duplex Half Duplex Displays whether the line is full duplex or half duplex Stop Monitoring Connection Status Displays the cable connection status Communication Rate Displays the communication speed Number of Disconnections Displays the number of times the line entered a state where communication cannot 0 to 65535
49. and click the Execute button to execute the PING test The test results are displayed in the Result box When executing the PING test from the RJ71EN71 by connecting the engineering tool and CPU module with an USB cable network number and station number setting is required to specify the PING executing station Action for abnormal end If the test fails check the following and perform the test again Whether the Ethernet equipped module is properly mounted on the base unit Connection to the Ethernet network Parameter settings written in the CPU module Operating status of the CPU module whether or not an error has occurred IP addresses set in the engineering tool and the PING test target station Whether the external device has been reset after the Ethernet equipped module was replaced 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 3 Checking the Network Status Communication Status Test The communication status test checks whether the communication between the own station and the external device on the same Ethernet is operated normally The following external devices are the target of communication status test e RJ71EN71 when the Ethernet function is used MELSEC Q series Ethernet interface module function version B or later MELSEC L series Ethernet interface module This test is performed on the network of stations connected to the engineering tool by sending the test messages sequentially to specified network and station
50. be performed Broadcast Time Maximum Maximum Size of Displays the maximum size of discarded broadcast messages 0 to 65535 Detection Amount of Data per Unit Displays the size latest value per second of discarded broadcast messages 0 to 4294967295 Time Latest Amount of Data per Unit Displays the size maximum value per second of discarded broadcast messages 0 to 4294967295 Click the Clear Line Status button to clear all the data in Broadcast Information of broadcast are not displayed when Q Compatible Ethernet is set in the network type of the RJ71EN71 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 7 3 3 Checking the Network Status 5 158 PING Test The PING test checks existence of an Ethernet device on the same Ethernet network This test is performed on the network of stations connected to the engineering tool by sending packets for check If a response returns the communication can be performed 722 Ethernet Diagnostics window gt PING Test button Test Input Item Address Specification IP Address Input Form IP Address bdeEc IP Address Host Name Setting Options E Display the Host Name Specify the Data Size 32 Byte Specify the Communication Time Check l Seconds Specify the Number of Sends Specify the Count 4 Times Execute Cancel Result Number of Successes Transmissions I Procedure Set the required items in Input Item
51. under Basic Settings 5 Page 127 External Device Configuration 1 Select UDP Connection Module in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area 2 Set Communication Method for the external device to Broadcast Send or Broadcast Receive 3 Set the other parameters required for communication in the connection Point Access via a router is not permitted when using broadcast send Precautions for broadcast communication Decide the dedicated port number for broadcast communication in the system and use that number Access via a router is not permitted when using broadcast send The external device connected on the same Ethernet must carry out a read discard processing if the message received with broadcast receiving is not required When the CPU module receives the data with broadcast receiving the IP address of the sending external device and the external device s port number can be retried with the SP SOCCINF instruction Precautions This section describes the precautions for exchanging data with socket communications Port number Port numbers 1 to 1023 are typically reserved port numbers WELL KNOWN PORT NUMBERS and 61440 to 65534 are used by other communication functions so 1024 to 4999 or 5010 to 61439 should be used for the own station port numbers 5000 to 5009 are used by the system and must be specified L Page 229 Port Numbers Used by Ethernet equipped Modu
52. 0 When all bits of the IP address for the Ethernet equipped module that correspond with the host address of each class in the IP address for the personal computer are on or off Ex IP address for the personal computer 192 168 0 1 lt 192 x x x class C and the host address is the fourth octet Subnet mask for the personal computer 255 0 0 0 IP address for the Ethernet equipped module 64 64 255 255 lt each bit turns on because of the fourth octet is 255 Point The IP address for each class are as follow Class A 0 x x x to 127 Class B 128 x x x to 191 x x x Class C 192 x x x to 223 x x x The host address for each class is the 0 section shown below Class A 255 0 0 0 Class B 255 255 0 0 Class C 255 255 255 0 1 2 SLMP Communications SLMP is a protocol used by external devices to access SLMP compatible devices via the Ethernet SLMP communications are available among devices that can receive send messages with the SLMP control procedure The Ethernet equipped module processes and transfers data following instructions command from the external device so the programmable controller only needs the open close processing and does not require a program for data communication For SLMP communications refer to the following LA SLMP Reference Manual Applications This section describes the applications of SLMP communications Data read write Data read write can be executed for the following d
53. 1 Set side I F to Ethernet Board 2 Double click Ethernet Board and open the PC side 1 ide I F Detailed Se hernet Board F Detailed Setting of Ethernet board window EM 3 Set the network number station number and protocol of Station No 2 Cancel the personal computer Set the network number and This setting is an assignment for Ethernet board Please execute the following settings Network No Network No of Ethernet module set in parameter Station No Station No that does not overlap on the same loop protocol according to the settings for the Ethernet equipped module Set the station number so that it is not Network No and station No are not necessary for the communication route shown below Communication with Ethernet port of CPU built in Ethernet Communication via GOT Transparent Communication via CC IE Field Ethernet adapter the same as a station number assigned to other Ethernet devices Protocol 4 Set the PLC side I F to the module to be connected 1 FUNCTIONS 21 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product GOT PLC side I F Detailed Setting of Ethernet Module 5 Double click the icon set in step 4 and open the PLC vb c side I F Detailed Setting window 6 Select Ethernet Port Direct Connection for the E connection method Please select Connection via HUB when you use 71 71 even if
54. 13D7H Status for each protocol System area 2005054 to 1E983EH to 2005079 1E9857H 5080 to 5081 13D8H to 13D9H TCP packet Received packet total count 2005080 to 1E9858H to 2005081 1E9859H 5082 to 5083 13DAH to 13DBH Received packet checksum error discard 2005082 to 1E985AH to count 2005083 1E985BH 5084 to 5085 13DCH to 13DDH Sent packet total count 2005084 to 1E985CH to 2005085 1E985DH 5086 to 5119 13DEH to 13FFH System area 2005086 to 1E985EH to 2005119 1E987FH 5120 to 5121 1400H to 1401H UDP packet Received packet total count 2005120 to 1E9880H to 2005121 1E9881H 5122 to 5123 1402H to 1403H Received packet checksum error discard 2005122 to 1E9882H to count 2005123 1E9883H 5124 to 5125 1404H to 1405H Sent packet total count 2005124 to 1E9884H to 2005125 1E9885H 5126 to 5159 1406H to 1427H System area 2005126 to 1E9886H to 2005159 1E98A7H 5160 to 5161 1428H to 1429H Receiving error Framing error count 2005160 to 1E98A8H to 2005161 1E98A9H 5162 to 5163 142AH to 142BH Receive FIFO overflow count 2005162 to 1E98AAH to 2005163 1E98ABH 5164 to 5165 142CH to 142DH CRC error count 2005164 to 1E98ACH to 2005165 1E98ADH 5166 to 5188 142EH to 1444H System area 2005166 to 1E98AEH to 2005188 1E98CAH 5189 1445H Own node operation LED status 2
55. 2B te Non conversion Variable Monitoring timer Variable unset error Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data Command 0104 28 yte Static Data Subcommand DODO 2B yte Non conversion Variable Head device No Variable unset error Fised Length 3B yte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Device code Variable unset error Fixed Length 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable The above window opens when Predefined Protocol Library is selected on the Add Protocol window When Add New or User Protocol Library has been selected configure the packets with the Change Type button and Add New button Number of device points Variable unset error Fixed Length 2B yte Lower Upper Byte No Swap For details on the packet elements refer to the following lt Page 36 Packet elements HWriting the protocol setting data Write the protocol setting data to the Ethernet equipped module YZ Online gt Write to Module Target Module Selection Module Selection 0000 8771 71 M Target Memory CPU Memory 7 Non written Data in Target Memory Manufacturer Packet Name Packet Setting Select the module and memory into which the protocol data is to be written and execute write When writing to a CPU module the protocol setting data is written into the module extension parameters
56. 41H 42H 43H Random access buffer H L Physical address Logical address 20000 0 4 20001 1 20002 2 4 20009 9 4 10 words 26143 6143 Response format RJ71EN71 external device Subheader End code 45H 32H 30H 30H 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer 93 94 Reading from buffer with read request from external device When exchanging data with binary codes Command format external device RJ71EN71 Subheader Start address Data length L D 61H OOH 14H OAH OOH Response format RJ71EN71 external device Subheader End code Text 10 words L HM D L E1H 00H 12H 78H 56H QAH 444 4 9AH lt Random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 20020 12H 34H 20 20021 56H 78H 21 20022 9AH BCH 22 A 20029 9AH BCH 29 26143 Le 6143 10 words 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer When exchanging data with ASCII codes Command format external device RJ71EN71 Subheader Start address Data length H L L 36H 31H OOH OOH 31H 34H OOH OOH 41H Response format RJ71EN71 external device Subheader End code 45H 31H 30H 30H Text 20 words H L L
57. CPU module When reading multiple files specify the file name and extension in the file path name with wild cards When reading multiple files receive is confirmed before transferring each file Specification format mget file path name Example When reading all files with CVS extension from files stored in SD memory card mget 2 CSV Caution read file is stored with the same file name in the FTP client side The storage destination is in the current connection directory when the FTP is started and connected mls Function Stores the file name of the file stored in the CPU module in the FTP client side file as log data Specification format mls source drive name V destination file path name Example When storing the file name of file stored in SD memory card into 20120702 LOG file mls 2 20120702 LOG Caution Always specify immediately after the source drive name Always specify the source drive name when specifying the destination file path name FTP client side f the destination file path name is not specified the file is stored with the file name determined by the FTP client s FTP application The transfer destination is in the currently connected directly when FTP is started and connected Similar command mdir mput Function Writes the file to the CPU module When writing multiple files specify the file name and extension in the file path name with wild cards When writing multiple files send is confi
58. Communication Status Test Are the parameter settings correct Check the module parameters of the Ethernet equipped module Correct the value for the following setting if it is wrongly set IP Address under Own Node Settings of Basic Settings Gateway Parameter Settings of Application Settings C Page 124 PARAMETER SETTINGS Is the program correct Check and correct the send program of the external device If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure 25 Page 153 Module communication test 1 1 The module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure QA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup Are the Ethernet cables used normally Check if the Ethernet cable which conforms the standard is used R3 MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup Check if the station to station distance is set within range Q1 MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup Check if the Ethernet cables are not disconnected Does the cabling condition bending radius meet the specifications Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable and correct the bending radius Is the hub used operating normally Check if the hub which conforms the standard is used LL1 MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup Power off
59. Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the last byte is stored to the upper byte When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the last byte is stored without any byte swap 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Data Storage Area Specify the start device for storing the variable value Specification The settable devices are listed below Inner user 172 Input X Output Y Internal relay M Latch relay L Link relay B Data register D Link register W File register File register R ZR Buffer Memory G device Send receive area for predefined protocol support function UnXG 1902000 to UnG1904047 3 1 Do not set local devices 2 Setwithin the device range specified with Device Label Memory Area Setting in Memory Device Setting under CPU Parameters 3 This cannot be set if the target module is a CPU module The following figures show the configuration of the data storage area When Fixed Length Variable Length is Fixed Length The area after the device number specified on the Element Setting window becomes the data storage area The occupied data storage area differs according to the Unit of Stored Data When Lower Byte Upper Byte is selected the same size as the data length is occupied However when the data length of a send packet is an o
60. Disable ll Settings incompatible with direct connection When using the RJ71EN71 a direct connection cannot be established if the following setting is made with Specify Connection Destination of the engineering tool When Other Station Co existence Network is selected for Other Station Setting When Other Station Single Network is selected for Other Station Setting and Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system is selected in the Network Communication Route Detailed Setting of Ethernet window llFunctions incompatible with direct connection The following functions cannot be used when the RJ71ENT 1 is directly connected To use the following functions connect the CPU module directly or with a USB cable CC Link IE Field Diagnostics CC Link IE Control Diagnostics 22 1 FUNCTIONS 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product and GOT Conditions that cannot communicate with direct connection Communication with a direct connection may be disabled if the following conditions apply If connection is not possible review the settings for the Ethernet equipped module and personal computer When all bits of the IP address for the Ethernet equipped module that correspond with the 0 section of the subnet mask for the personal computer are on or off ex IP address for the Ethernet equipped module 64 64 255 255 IP address for the personal computer 64 64 1 1 Subnet mask for the personal computer 255 255 0
61. Ethernet read write arbitrary data and access other stations such as remote RUN STOP If the initial processing for the own station relay station and access station s RJ71EN71 is completed normally the other station can be accessed with the link dedicated instructions This section describes the procedure for accessing a CPU module in another station on the same Ethernet line When exchanging data with a different network refer to the following C Page 226 Communications with Different Networks Restriction communications using the link dedicated instruction is not available when the Ethernet function of the CPU module is used Applicable dedicated instructions Shows the link dedicated instructions used for data communication Instruction Description SEND Sends data to another station RECV Reads the receive data from another station for main program RECVS Reads the receive data from another station for interrupt program READ Reads data from the word device of another station SREAD Reads data from the word device of another station with completion device WRITE Writes data in the word device of another station SWRITE Writes data in the word device of another station with completion device REQ Requests the remote RUN STOP to the CPU module on another station Reads writes clock data from to another station ZNRD Reads data from the word device in another station ACPU ZNWR Writes data
62. IP Assembly Timer The communication data may be divided at the IP level before being Unit s 1 to 16383 Unit ms 100 to 16383000 Default 5s 1 Setin increments of 100ms 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 13 2 3 Application Settings 5 Precautions for settings Setting value for each timer of the Ethernet equipped module side Set the timer values so that the following formula is met Response TCP IP monitoring timer 2 TCP ULP 2 TCP end gt resend gt assembly timer value timer value timer value timer value value TCP resend _ TCP zero window timer value timer value When connecting Mitsubishi products to the line configure the same settings for both modules Setting value for each timer of the external device side Set the timer values so that the following formula is met The frequency of a communication error such as a transmission timeout may be higher if the timer values do not meet the formula value on the external on the Ethernet equipped TCP ULP timer TCP resend timer value gt device module Monitoring timer value of the TCP ULP timer value on application software on the external gt the Ethernet equipped xn device module 1 is the number of TCP segment transmission and is calculated by the following formula Message size sent by the Ethernet equipped module n value that is rounded up to the nearest integer Ex The number of TCP segment transmission when communications ar
63. Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Data flow Data flow is used to specify the order of send data and receive data The data flow can be specified in forward direction upper byte lower byte reverse direction lower byte upper byte and byte swap by word Forward direction reverse direction Available when the data length is 2 bytes or more Byte swap Available only when the data length is 4 bytes Calculating range Examples of specifying the length calculating range are shown below Packet Packet Packet Packet Packet Packet element 1 element 2 element 3 element 30 element 31 element 32 gt pid os gt k gt k gt Packet t rmat Length Non conversion wg kas Static data Staticdata Static data variable Calculating range for the length Example 1 Example 2 lq Calculating range for the length Calculating range for the length Example 3 4 gt Example 1 Calculating range when start of range is set as 3 and end is set as 3 Example 2 Calculating range when start of range is set as 3 and end is set as 30 Example 3 Calculating range when start of range is set as 1 and end is set as 32 Non conversion Variable llProcess procedure The Ethernet equipped module processes the non conversion variable element with the following procedure When unit of stored data is Lower Byte Upper Byte When the data length of a send packet is an odd number th
64. Information gt RJ71EN71 gt Port 1 Module Parameter Ethernet gt Basic Settings gt External Device Configuration Ethernet Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Sensor Device Address PortNo MAC Address Host Name P Adres Port No Subnet Mask Gateway 192 0 1 101 40 5 Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system XZ Online gt Write to PLC In this example default values were used for parameters that are not shown above For the parameter setting refer to the chapter explaining the parameters in this manual 27 Page 124 PARAMETER SETTINGS 1 FUNCTIONS 49 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 50 Module label EN71 EE 1 bnCompletion ConnectionOpen 1 Open completion signal connection No 1 U0 G1900000 0 EN71 EE 1 uCompletion Ethernetlnitialized D O Initial status U0 G1900024 0 EN71_EE_1 bReady_PredefinedProtocol_D Predefined protocol ready U0 G1901002 0 Label to be defined Define global labels as shown below Label Name Data Type Class Assign Device Labe bStart bComp Bit 0 1 bComp OK Bit GLOBAL bComp NG uCountrolData Word Unsigned Bit S
65. Login name set with Ethernet equipped module parameters FTP password FTP password set with Ethernet equipped module parameters Example 1 When specifying the user name user RJ71EN71 Example 2 When specifying the user name and password user RJ71EN71 RJ71EN71 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server llEthernet equipped module dedicated subcommand This section describes the Ethernet equipped module dedicated subcommands that are added to the FTP command s quote command and sent Command name Description change Function Shows or changes the attributes of files stored in the CPU module Specification format 1 When displaying the file attributes quote change file path name One of the following is displayed as the execution results when the process ends normally When specified file is read only R When specified file is writable and readable W Specification format 2 When changing the file attributes quote change file path name attribute Specify the attributes with one of the following methods When changing to a read only file r When changing to a writable and readable file w Example 1 When displaying the attributes of files stored in the SD memory card quote change 2 PRG1 PRG Example 2 When changing the attributes of files stored in the SD memory card quote change 2 PRG1 PRG cpuchg Function Specifies the access destination CPU mod
66. The A station can be accessed if the communication line is open The D station can access the O station after the remote password for 3 2 station 1 is unlocked The A station can be accessed if the communication line is open 1 FUNCTIONS 1 10 Security Function 1 1 7 Precautions The following section lists the precautions for using remote password Set connection Set the remote password for the connection used to exchange data with an external device that can execute the unlock lock processing When remote password is set for UDP IP connection Determine the external device to communicate with and exchange the data With UPD IP after the remote password is unlocked data can be exchanged with devices other than the unlocked external device too Determine the communication device before starting use Always lock the remote password after data communication is finished If the remote password is not locked the unlocked state is held until timeout occurs Set UDP for Existence Confirmation of the target connection in External Device Configuration under Basic Settings Set as small a value as possible for the Destination Alive Check Start Interval Timer and Destination Alive Check Interval Timer in Timer Settings for Data Communication under Application Settings close processing If the TCP IP is closed before the TCP IP is locked the CPU module will automatically start the lock processing
67. Uae acs BAe HORIS d RU OPPS eee m JOE RU eee LACE HER 13 Hz caer 14 CHAPTER 1 FUNCTIONS 16 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product and 16 Connection vid oni ka RE Eee doe eta d goo Re Bidar ange Wal argu 16 Direct connecti n i ou aa gad RE Re RE ee aE eee tae hbri d s 21 1 2 SLMP Communications oso sce eee RE Rx eee cercle es nee eie Rie IRR 23 Applicatioris s 52d vod ET DS web quale uel eie dunes der Rcs Maes Cabs i tonta 23 Communication 2 24 Data communication 25 List of valid commands 26 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined 1 28 Applicable connections ceis serere ddeuda ede eka Rygbv dU ae RUE GE a RA S E RAO eda x ted 28 Data communication 4 4 4 29 Protocol communication type i27 d debere usse wo UR dor Lie bue dH dot d pagos 35 Packet elements iL ure eese x E SS Run
68. address CC Link IE Controller Network Network number IP address of the partner station of the own vini Logical i station POCUC MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Sun CC Link IE Field Network i and station number i of the destination 1 beds routing Conversion processing of the IP address calculation system is as below When a communication request message command frame to access other station is received the IP address is calculated from the network number and station number of the destination in the communication request message which are stored in the Ethernet equipped module and the communication request message is sent to the next station relay station or destination station The response message response for the communication request message is returned based on the return IP address and the stored data above ex IP address calculation example The logical product and logical sum are calculated differently depending on the class of the own station IP address An IP address is calculated as follows For class A When the own station IP address is 79238102H When the net mask pattern for routing other networks is FF000000H When the destination network number is 03H and the station number is 05H Own station IP Address 7 9 2 3 8 1 0 2 Net Mask Pattern 1 Logical product F F 0 0 0 0 0 0 Logical product value 7 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 Netw
69. allowed or denied by the IP filter function Range specification and specification of the IP addresses to be excluded from the set range are also possible Access from IP address below Select whether to allow or deny the access from the specified IP Allow addresses Deny Default Allow Range Setting Select this item when specifying the IP addresses by range Default Clear IP Address Set the IP address to be allowed or denied 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 When selecting Specify Range enter the start IP address left field Default Blank and end IP address right field of the range IP Address Excluded from Range When selecting Specify Range set the IP address to be excluded 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 from the set range Default Blank Up to 32 IP addresses can be set Gateway Parameter Settings With gateway parameter settings the Ethernet equipped module can communicate with external devices on other Ethernet networks via a router and gateway One default router and up to eight routers can be set Gateway Other Than Default Gateway Set to communicate with an external device on the other Ethernet viaa Use router Not Use Default Not Use Gateway No 1 No 8 Set the information of the gateway other than the default gateway Information Page 139 Gateway Information Set the default gateway when communicating via the default gateway 27 Page 125 Own Node Settings 138 2 PARA
70. available GP ECPRTCL Executes the protocol registered with the engineering tool s communication protocol SP ECPRTCL support function The following table lists the dedicated instructions used for socket communications Available Not available GP SOCRCV Reads the receive data from the external device SP SOCRCV x O GSOCRCVS O O S SOCRCVS x GP SOCSND Sends data to the external device O O SP SOCSND x O SP SOCCINF Reads connection information x SP SOCCSET Changes the communication target x SP SOCRMODE Changes the connection receive mode x S P SOCRDATA Reads the specified size of data from the socket communication receive data area x inications using a fixed buffer The following table lists the dedicated instructions used in the RJ71EN71 for communications using a fixed buffer BUFRCV Reads the receive data from the external device BUFRCVS Reads the receive data with an interrupt program BUFSND Sends data to the external device APPENDICES APPENDIX 21 7 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instruction Link dedicated instructions The following table lists the dedicated instructions used the RJ71EN71 for transient transmission with programmable controllers on other stations Each link dedicated instruction allows access to a station on a network other than Ethernet Inst
71. devices consecutive device No in one word units 0003 Writes value to the bit devices consecutive device No in one point units 0002 Writes value to the bit devices consecutive device No in 16 point units Writes value to the word devices consecutive device No in one word units Read Random 0403 00110 Specifies the device number and reads value from the word devices one word units or two word units This can be specified with inconsecutive device No 0002 Specifies the device number and reads value from the word devices in one word units or two word units This can be specified with inconsecutive device No Write Random 1402 0001 Specifies the device No to bit device in one point units and writes value This can be specified with inconsecutive device No 0000 Specifies the device No to bit device 16 point units and writes value This be specified with inconsecutive device No Specifies the device No to word device in one word units or two word units and writes value This can be specified with inconsecutive device No 0003 Specifies the device No to bit device in one point units and writes value This can be specified with inconsecutive device No 0002 Specifies the device No to bit device 16 point units and writes value This be specified with inconsecutive device No Specifies the device No to word device in one word units or two word units and writes value This can be specified with inconsecuti
72. each protocol IP packet Received packet total count 2005000 to 1E9808H to 2005001 1E9809H 5002 to 5003 138AH to 138BH Received packet checksum error discard 2005002 to 1E980AH to count 2005003 1E980BH 5004 to 5005 138CH to 138DH Sent packet total count 2005004 to 1E980CH to 2005005 1E980DH 5006 to 5021 138EH to 139DH System area 2005006 to 1E980EH to 2005021 1E981DH 5022 to 5023 139EH to 139FH Simultaneous transmission error detection 2005022 to 1E981EH to count receive buffer full count 2005023 1E981FH 5024 to 5039 13A0H to 13AFH System area 2005024 to 1E9820H to 2005039 1E982FH 5040 to 5041 1 to 13B1H ICMP packet Received packet total count 2005040 to 1E9830H to 2005041 1E9831H 5042 to 5043 13B2H to 13B3H Received packet checksum error discard 2005042 to 1E9832H to count 2005043 1E9833H 5044 to 5045 13B4H to 13B5H Sent packet total count 2005044 to 1E9834H to 2005045 1E9835H 5046 to 5047 13B6H to 13B7H Received echo request total count 2005046 to 1E9836H to 2005047 1E9837H 5048 to 5049 13B8H to 13B9H Sent echo replay total count 2005048 to 1E9838H to 2005049 1E9839H 5050 to 5051 13BAH to 13BBH Sent echo request total count 2005050 to 1E983AH to 2005051 1E983BH 5052 to 5053 13BCH to 13BDH Received echo reply total count 2005052 to 1E983CH to 2005053 1E983DH 192 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 5054 to 5079 13BEH to
73. either at a communication request source station communication relay station or communication request destination station Conversion processing of the combination system is as below When a communication request message command frame to access other station is received the communication request message is sent to the next station obtained by the table conversion system at first If the IP address of the external device cannot be obtained by the table conversion system the IP address is obtained by the IP address calculation system to send the communication request message The response message response to the communication request message is returned based on the return IP address and data in the conversion table or the stored data The relationship between the conversion method and the definition of the Ethernet equipped module mounted station is as follows O Can be set X Cannot be set Automatic Response System x x IP Address Calculation System O O O Table Conversion System O Combination System O O O O 1 For the external device that completed the communication the station can be a communication request source station or a relay sending station Specify the mask value based on the guidelines given below This pattern is used in a logical sum with the own station IP address when calculating the IP address of the external device using the IP address calculation system Whe
74. error code for each connection is stored Un G100 Connection No 1 latest error code Un G101 Connection No 2 latest error code Un G162 Connection No 63 latest error code Un G163 Connection No 64 latest error code ol IP packet Un G5000 to Un1G5023 The IP status is counted in the range of 0 to 4294967295 FFFFFFFH Un G5000 to Un G5001 Received packet total count Un G5002 to Un G5003 Received packet checksum error discard count Un G5004 to Un G5005 Sent packet total count Un G5022 to Un G5023 Simultaneous transmission error detection count receive buffer full count ICMP packet Un G5040 to Un1G5053 The ICMP status is counted in the range of 0 to 4294967295 FFFFFFFH Un G5040 to Un G5041 Received packet total count Un G5042 to Un G5043 Received packet checksum error discard count Un G5044 to Un G5045 Sent packet total count Un G5046 to Un G5047 Received echo request total count Un G5048 to Un G5049 Sent echo replay total count Un G5050 to Un G5051 Sent echo request total count Un G5052 to Un G5053 Received echo reply total count packet Un G5080 to Un G5085 The TCP status is counted in the range of 0 to 4294967295 FFFFFFFH Un G5080 to Un G5081 Received packet total count Un G5082 to Un G5083 Received packet checksum error discard count Un G5084 to Un G5085 Sent packet total count
75. error occurs at the timing shown in the figure below in communications using the fixed buffer BUFSND instruction lt BUFSND instruction gt 1 scan Completion device 1 RJ71EN71 3rd retry Data 1st retry 2nd retry i command i i A 1 1 59 amp M TCP ULP timeout value gt i A TCP resend timer value The time at which data are sent when ACK is not returned after data transmission When not performing the above retry process when setting 0 time configure the setting so that the following formula is met TCP ULP timer value TCP end timer value TCP resend timer value Set the same value for the timer values 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 137 2 3 Application Settings Security Set the security measures for access to the Ethernet equipped module IP Filter IP Filter Set whether to enable the IP filter function Not Use Settings Use Default Not Use IP Filter Settings Set the IP address to be allowed or denied 1 5 138 IP Filter Settings Disable Direct Connection with MELSOFT Set whether enable or disable direct connection to the engineering tool Disable Enable Default Enable Do Not Respond to CPU Module Search Select whether to respond to the CPU module search Do Not Respond Respond Default Respond Up to 32 IP addresses can be set as an IP address to be
76. external device G SOCRCVS GP SOCSND Sends data to the external device instructions used by the CPU module SP SOCOPEN Establishes a connection SP SOCCLOSE Closes the connection SP SOCRCV Reads the receive data from the external device G SOCRCVS S SOCRCVS GP SOCSND Sends data to the external device SP SOCSND SP SOCCINF Reads connection information SP SOCCSET Changes the communication target SP SOCRMODE Changes the connection receive mode S P SOCRDATA Reads the specified size of data from the socket communications receive data area If the instruction has a completion device do not change the various data such as control data and request data specified with the executed instruction until execution of the instruction is completed Applicable connections The following connections can be used for data exchange with socket communications RJ71EN71 P1 connector Connection No 17 to 64 P2 connector Connection No 1 to 64 CPU module Connection No 1 to 16 1 FUNCTIONS 3 1 4 Socket Communications 5 54 Communication structure With socket communications port numbers that identify the communication are used to enable multiple communication sessions with the external device These are used for both TCP IP and UDP IP For send Specify send source Ethernet equipped module s port number and the send destination external device s port number For receive Specify the Ethern
77. for data read write in bit units destination has been issued to a word device Correct the request details and send the SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again C073H The access destination of the SLMP message cannot Correct the request details of the SLMP message issue this request For example the number of double word access points cannot be specified for modules other than a R Q QnACPU C075H The request data length for the label access is out of Correct the number of read write points and send the range SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again Correct the label to shorten the label name and send the SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again C081H The termination processing for the Ethernet equipped Finish all the communications to perform the module that involves the reinitialization processing is in reinitialization processing of the Ethernet equipped execution and if communications using data link module dedicated instructions have reached cannot be checked C083H The communication processing was abnormally ended in Check if the relay station and external station are the link dedicated instruction communications operating normally Check if there is an error with the cable connection between the own station and the external station If the line is heavily loaded reduce the load and retry the operation Increase the number of resends for the link dedicated instructions and
78. frame setting b5 1 Do not open by program 0 Ethernet 1 IEEE 802 3 Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 0 Disable 1 Enable Initial timing setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time 398 to 399 18EH to 18FH Simultaneous transmission error detection count Receive buffer full count 20486 5006H Remote password status Remote password lock unlocked status user connection Initial value OH Initial value Depending on the remote password setting 20487 5007H Remote password status Remote password lock unlocked status system Initial value OH connection Initial value Depending on the remote password setting 20595 5073H Connection No 1 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 1 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20600 5078H Connection No 2 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 2 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20605 507DH Connection No 3 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 3 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 201 20610 5082H Connection No 4 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 4 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20615 5087H Connection No 5 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 5 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20620 508
79. hardware failure 257 Page 153 Module communication test 1 The buffer memory address is for when the network type of the RJ71EN71 is set to Ethernet and the P1 connector is used When using the P2 connector or the CPU module or setting the network type to Q Compatible Ethernet refer to the following Page 191 Buffer Memory 2 The module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup Direct connection to the engineering tool is not possible When the direct connection to the engineering tool check the following items Is the Ethernet equipped module directly connected to the engineering tool with a single cable Directly connect the Ethernet equipped module to the engineering tool with a single cable Is Disable Direct Connection with MELSOFT under Security of Application Settings is set to Disable If Disable Direct Connection with MELSOFT is set to Disable change the setting to Enable Is the transfer setup setting of the engineering tool correct If the setting is incorrect check the following items Check that Ethernet Board is selected in PC side I F Check that Ethernet Port Direct Connection is selected in the PLC side 1 F Detailed Setting of PLC Module window or PLC side I F Detailed Setting of Ethernet Module window o
80. instruction Check if the sending station and relay station are operating normally C1A2H A response to the request could not be received Check and correct the response waiting time In transient transmission the number of relay to other Change the system configuration so that the number of networks exceeded seven relay stations may be seven or less For the RECV instruction execute again after correcting the channels used by own station in the control data For the RECV instruction check that RECV execution request Un1G5301 b0 to b7 are on C1A4H A request or subrequest is incorrect Correct the request and subrequest C1A5H The specified target station or clear target is incorrect Correct the specified the target station or clear target C1A6H The specified connection number is incorrect Correct the setting value of the connection number C1AT7H The specified network number is incorrect Correct the specified network number C1A8H The specified station number is incorrect Correct the specified station number C1A9H The specified device number is incorrect Correct the specified device number C1AAH The specified device name is incorrect Correct the specified device name C1ACH The specified number of resends is incorrect Correct the number of resends C1ADH The specified data length is incorrect Correct the specified data length C1AFH The specified port number is incorrect Correct the spec
81. is incorrect Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation If the error occurs again even after taking the above please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C1D2H The target station IP address of the link dedicated Execute the link dedicated instruction again after instruction is incorrect correcting the IP address C1D3H The dedicated instruction not supported by the Check that the dedicated instruction can be executed communication method of the connection was executed by the specified communication method Correct the program when the instruction cannot be executed Check that there is no error in the connection specification of the dedicated instruction C200H The remote password is incorrect Correct the remote password and unlock lock the remote password again C201H The remote password status of the port used for After unlocking the remote password perform communications is in the lock status communications C202H When another station was accessed the remote When accessing another station do not set the remote password could not be unlocked password on the relay station or access station or do not execute the remote password check on them C203H An error has occurred by checking the remote password Correct the remote password and unlock lock the remote password again C204H The device is different from the one requesting the Request the lock processing of the remote passwo
82. is no data lost due to a receive error predefined protocol is incorrect Check that there is no error in the data packet sent by the external device C417H The data length or data quantity of the received data Check the maximum allowable data length and specify using the predefined protocol is out of range the maximum length or less in the data length storage area Check the maximum allowable data quantity and specify the maximum quantity or less in the data quantity storage area C420H Protocol setting data write has failed Write the data again If the error occurs again even after taking the above the possible cause is a hardware failure of the specified module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C421H Writing was requested to the module whose flash ROM Replace the module because the number of writes write count had exceeded the limit exceeded the limit C430H Protocol setting data was written during the ECPRTCL Do not write the protocol setting data during the instruction execution ECPRTCL instruction execution 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 179 C431H Close processing of the connection was performed during the ECPRTCL instruction execution Check the operation of the external device Check the connection open status with the external device Open the connection with the external device again and execute the instruction C440H A communicati
83. is set in Opening Method under Own Node Settings in Basic Settings the connection will not return to the open request standby state after the close processing completes 222 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications Open by Program is set Before the open close request is received from the external device the Ethernet equipped module must execute the OPEN CLOSE instruction and enter the open close standby state Data can be sent and received after the open processing completes normally For OPEN CLOSE instruction refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Ex Open close processing for connection No 1 Parameter communications Power on completed Open status Open enable status closed Active open acceptance enabled Closed status Initial status i i Un G1900024 0 OPEN instruction lt gt 1 scan OPEN instruction completion device Abnormally ended OPEN instruction completion device 1 CLOSE instruction CLOSE instruction completion device Abnormally _____ ended CLOSE instruction completion device 1 Open completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 Open request signal connection No 1 T Un G1900008 0 SYN ACK FIN ACK ef of SYN ACK FIN ACK After the module paramete
84. not required 1 11 Setting not required Setting not required decimal IP Address 192 0 1 11 Item Setting details of each Ethernet equipped module when accessing from 3 to 4 1 2 3 Communication 4 relay sending station a Setting value Network number station number Setting not required Setting not required 2 22 Setting not required decimal IP Address 192 0 2 22 Item Setting details of each Ethernet equipped module when accessing from 4 to 1 1 Communication request source 2 Communication relay sending 3 Communication relay receiving 4 Communication request destination station b station a station b station a Setting value Network number station number 1 12 1 11 2 22 2 21 decimal IP Address 192 0 1 12 192 0 1 11 192 0 2 22 192 0 2 21 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings 145 Setting value Network number station number Setting not required Setting not required Setting not required 2 21 decimal IP Address 192 0 2 21 Combination System This system combines the IP address calculation system and the table conversion system Select this system when accessing other stations with the same network number accessing other stations in other networks or Ethernet with different network number or relaying from other networks to the Ethernet network system The set target Ethernet equipped module can be installed
85. of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the connection cable is disconnected Check that there is no connection failure with the switching hub Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C410H Receive waiting time of the ECPRTCL instruction timed Check if the cable is disconnected out Correct the specified connection number of the external device in the connection configuration setting of the Ethernet equipped module and execute the protocol again Check that there is no error in the external device Check that the sending from the external device is not interrupted Check that there is no data lost due to a receive error Check that there is no error in the data packet sent by the external device C412H The data which cannot be converted from ASCII to binary Check that there is no data lost due to a receive error code was received Check that there is no error in the data packet sent by the external device C413H The number of digits of the received data using the Check that there is no data lost due to a receive error predefined protocol is not sufficient Check that there is no error in the data packet sent by the external device C414H The number of digits of the received data using the Check that there
86. own node settings and external device configuration of the Ethernet equipped module l Setting Item List Setting Item the Setting Item to Search Basic Settings Parameter Editor Communications by Network No Station No Disable Setting Method Use IP Address Network Number Station No Transient Transmission Group 0 Enable Disable Online Change Disable All SLMP Communication Data Code Binary Do Not Open by Program lt Detailed Setting gt Explanation Set the information of the own node such as IP address Own Node Settings Set the IP address and communication data code of the Ethernet equipped module Page 125 Own Node Settings External Device Configuration Set the method and protocol used for communicating with external devices Page 127 External Device Configuration 124 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 1 Setting Parameters Own Node Settings Set the IP address and communication data code of the Ethernet equipped module Item Description Setting range Parameter Setting Method Set the own station settings by parameters Parameter Editor fixed IP Address IP Address Set the IP address of the own station Blank Ensure that the Ethernet equipped module on the own station and the external device to be communicated with have the same class and subnet address Consult with the network manager for the IP address setting
87. possible When changing the setting value determine the response monitoring timer value upon consulting with the system administrator Set a value within the following range 5 1 to 16383 1 100 to 16383000 ms 1 Set in increments of 100ms Time Setting Set the time setting function SNTP client Time Setting SNTP Client Select whether to use the time setting function SNTP client Not Use Use Default Not Use SNTP Server IP Address Set the IP address of the SNTP server 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 Default 0 0 0 1 Timer Setting After Power on and Reset Select whether to execute the time setting function upon power on or Disable reset Enable Default Disable Execution Select the execution timing of the time setting Fixed Time Timing Specified Time Intervals Default Fixed Time Specified Time Intervals When Specified Time Intervals is selected set the time interval 1 to 1440 minute of time setting executions Default 1 Minute Specified Time Hour When Fixed Time is selected set the day of the week and the clock Minute Day of Week time hour and minute when the time setting function is executed Page 134 Specified Time Hour Minute Day of Week The SNTP server must be only one in a network The time to be output is the same even though multiple modules in the same system obtain time from the same SNTP server cution Timing lBSpecifie
88. returns an error response according to the communication data code setting The buffer memory address is for when the network type of the RJ71EN71 is set to Ethernet and the P1 connector is used When using the P2 connector or the CPU module or setting the network type to Q Compatible Ethernet refer to the following Page 191 Buffer Memory Check this item only for the modules that have Module Operation Mode in the module parameters 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom A message sent from the external device cannot be received frequently When the Ethernet equipped module frequently fails to receive a message sent from the external device check the following items Are there many detected errors in Simultaneous transmission error detection count receive buffer full count Un G5022 to Un G5023 Has system error been stored Latest error code Un G100 to Un G163 Connection No 1 to No 64 latest error code If many errors are detected or a system error is stored there may be a heavy load on the Ethernet line due to data sending and receiving between connected devices Taking action such as separating networks or decreasing the number of data sending reduces the load on the Ethernet line Consult with the network manager and reduce the load on the Ethernet line If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for
89. series Ethernet interface modules The following table lists the buffer memory addresses having specifications that differ from the ones of the MELSEC Q series Ethernet interface module 0to 1 OH to 1H Own station E71 IP address Own station IP address Initial value CO0001FEH Initial value COA80328H 4 4H Special function settings Special function settings Initial value 100H Initial value 10H 31 1FH Communication condition setting Ethernet Operation Communication condition setting area Setting area Initial value 100H Initial value OH Communication data code b1 Communication data code setting b1 0 Binary 0 Communications in a binary code 1 ASCII 1 Communications in an ASCII code Enable disable online change b6 TCP existence confirmation setting b4 0 Disable all SLMP 0 Use the Ping 1 Enable all SLMP 1 Use the KeepAlive Opening method b8 Send frame setting b5 0 Open by program 0 Ethernet 1 Do not open by program 1 IEEE 802 3 Reinitialization specification b15 Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 0 Reinitialization process complete reset by the system 0 Disable 1 Reinitialization process request set by the user 1 Enable Initial timing setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Reinitialization specification b15 0 Reinitialization process complet
90. set in Routing Setting of the CPU Parameters setting of Routing Setting has a priority Module Operation Mode Set the module operation mode Set the same operation mode for both of the P1 connector and P2 connector For details on module communication test mode refer to the following Page 153 Module communication test Module Operation Mode Online Online Normal operation mode Offline Offline Module Communication Test Communication with other stations and dedicated instruction cannot Default Online be performed in this mode Select this mode to debug the program while the network is not yet connected Module Communication Test A mode for operating the module communication test Select this mode to check the operation when the module is in abnormal condition 148 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings 3 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting of when the Ethernet function is used 3 1 Checking with LED This section describes troubleshooting using LED Error status can be determined by status of the RUN LED and the ERR LED Off On flashing Major error An error such as hardware failure or memory failure The module stops operating On Flashing Moderate error An error such as parameter error which affect module operation The module stops operating On On Minor error An error such as communication failure The module continues operating 1
91. setting 1 Protocol preferences 65535 Cannot identify 1 Un G1901022 Packet number When an error is detected in the protocol setting data stores the packet number that detected the error The packets are checked in order of send packets and then receive packets expected packets from smallest number The packet number where an error was detected first is stored Valid when setting type value is 0 0 Send packet 1 to 16 Receive packet number 65535 Cannot identify Un G1901023 Element number When an error is detected in the protocol setting data stores the element number where the error was detected The elements are checked in order of smallest element number The element number where an error was detected first is stored Valid when setting type value is 0 1 to 32 Element number 65535 Cannot identify 1 The setting value may be unidentifiable 65535 in the following cases When a setting that cannot be detected by the current Ethernet equipped module version is written in When protocol setting data is broken hardware failure Number of registered predefined protocols Un G1901024 Un G1901024 Stores the protocol number of the registered protocol setting data 0 is stored if the protocol setting data check result is abnormal 0 No registration 1 to 128 Number of registrations llPredefined protocol registration Un G1901032 to Un G1901047 Whether protocol setting data is registered or
92. side cannot be set IP Packet Transfer Setting Set when using the IP packet transfer function The IP packet transfer function enables the Ethernet device such as computers connected to the Ethernet equipped module to communicate with the device on other networks that has an IP address via CC Link IE Field Network or CC Link IE Controller Network To use the this function set IP Packet Transfer Function to Not Use Default Not Use For details on the IP packet transfer function refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Controller Network User s Manual Application MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application Point If the application time out of the request source device occurs due to a heavy communication load on the path that an IP packet takes measure the response time using the PING command from the request source device and adjust the application timeout time Data size must be within 1460 bytes when the PING command is used 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 147 2 3 Application Settings Network Dynamic Routing Set when using the dynamic routing Setting Network Dynamic Routing is possible only when values are set in Network Number and Station No under Own Node Settings of Basic Settings 25 Page 126 Communications by Network No Station No For details refer to the following Page 226 Communications with Different Networks Point When the communication path is
93. the status of the CPU module changed from STOP to RUN state The predefined protocol settings written in the SD memory card can be transferred to the CPU module memory by using boot operation For details on boot operation refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application ing procedure Set External Device Configuration under Basic Settings 25 Page 127 External Device Configuration 1 Selectthe external device to be connected in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area UDP Connection Module Select to communicate with the external device using UDP IP Active Connection Module Select to perform the open processing to the external device from the Ethernet equipped module Active open and communicate using TCP IP Unpassive Connection Module Select to receive the open processing from a unspecified external device Unpassive open and communicate using TCP IP Fullpassive Connection Module Select to receive the open processing from the specified external device Fullpassive open and communicate using TCP IP 2 Set Communication Procedure for the external device to Predefined Protocol 3 Setthe other parameters required for communication in the connection sable dedicated instructions The dedicated instructions used for communications using the predefined protocol are shown below Usable Not usable GP ECPRT
94. the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure QA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 5 166 Socket communications communications using a fixed buffer cannot be performed When socket communications or communications using a fixed buffer cannot be performed check the following items and take action Check item Action Has the connection with the external device been opened Check Open completion signal Un G1900000 to Un G1900007 72 If the connection with the external device is not opened perform the open processing If an error occurs check and eliminate the error cause Has the send receive processing been executed properly f the send receive processing has not been executed check and correct the execution condition of the send receive processing If send receive processing has completed with an error check the error code in the completion status and eliminate the error cause Does Socket fixed buffer reception status signal Un G1900016 to Un G1900023 turn on when receive processing is executed Send data from the external device If data has been sent check that the destination address IP address and port number is correctly set Is the communication method of the connection used for communication with the external device is set to an item other than the following in the External De
95. to 1E994EH to 2005625 1 9 79 5626 15FAH Remote password lock Remote password lock status connection No 1 to 16 2005626 1E9A7AH status storage area 5627 15FBH Remote password lock status connection No 17 to 32 2005627 1E9A7BH 5628 15FCH Remote password lock status connection No 33 to 48 2005628 1E9A7CH 5629 15FDH Remote password lock status connection No 49 to 64 2005629 1E9A7DH 5630 15FEH Remote password lock status system port 2005630 1E9A7EH 5631 to 5645 2005631 to 15FFH to 160DH 1E9A7FH to System area 2005645 1E9A8DH 5646 160EH Forced connection Forced connection invalidation connection No 1 to 16 2005646 1E9A8EH invalidation setting area 5647 160FH Forced connection invalidation connection No 17 to 32 2005647 1E9A8FH 5648 1610H Forced connection invalidation connection No 33 to 48 2005648 1E9A90H 5649 1611H Forced connection invalidation connection No 49 to 64 2005649 1E9A91H 5650 1612H Forced connection invalidation system port 2005650 1E9A92H 5651 to 8299 1613H to 206BH System area 2005651 to 1E9A93H to 2008299 1EA4EBH 8300 206CH Predefined protocol Connection No 1 Protocol execution status 2008300 1EA4ECH support function 8301 206DH execution status check System area 2008301 1EA4EDH area 8302 to 8317 206EH to 207DH Received data verification re
96. to Un G1900007 OFF 900015 1 TCP disconnection request from the Ethernet equipped module n oun t t OPEN instruction CLOSE instruction lt When disconnected by the external device gt PT TCP disconnection request from the external device TCP disconnection completed upon response from the Ethernet equipped module CLOSE instruction 1 FUNCTIONS 7 1 4 Socket Communications 5 58 llPrecautions for Passive open Use Open completion signal Un G1900000 to Un G1900007 and Open request signal Un G1900008 to Un G1900015 in the program to create an interlock circuit The on off timing for the open completion signal and open request signal is shown below TCP disconnection completed by the external device Open completion signal ON Un G1900000 to Un G1900007 OFF Open request signal ON Un G1900008 to Un G1900015 OFF TCP connection completed by the external device Always on When the CPU module is connected to the external device with Passive open the connected external device s IP address or the external device s port number can be retrieved with the SP SOCCINF instruction With TCP IP one external device is connected to with one connection To connect with multiple external devices with the same own station port number provide a connection for each external device If more external devices than the prepa
97. two connectors llProcedure 1 Setthe following item of the P1 and P2 to Module Communication Test 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt RJ71EN71 Module Parameter Application Settings Module Operation Mode 2 Connect the P1 and P2 of the RJ71EN71 with an Ethernet cable 3 Write the module parameters to the CPU module 4 Resetor power off and on the CPU module to start the module communication test Do not perform a module communication test while connected to another station The operation of another station may failed llChecking the status and result of module communication test The test status and result can be checked with the dot matrix LED of the module Test in progress The dot matrix LED displays UCT Normal completion The dot matrix LED displays OK Abnormal end The ERR LED turns on and the dot matrix LED displays ERR and error number alternately at intervals of 1 second number when the test abnormally ended The dot matrix LED displays the error number with the form of Target Ethernet port Error number For example 1 3 is displayed when error No 3 occurs in P1 If the module communication test fails take the following actions 1 Internal self loopback test Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative failure 2 External self loopback test Check the Ethernet cable connection or replace the Ethernet cable and
98. unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 11 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close 204 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 20649 50A9H 20651 50ABH 20652 50ACH 20653 50ADH 20654 50AEH 20656 50B0H 20657 50B1H 20658 50B2H 20659 50B3H 20661 50B5H 20662 50B6H 20663 50B7H 20664 50B8H 20666 50BAH 20667 50BBH 20668 50BCH 20669 50BDH 20671 50BFH 20672 50COH 20673 50C1H 20674 50C2H 20676 50C4H 20677 50C5H 20678 50C6H Monitoring area Remote password function monitoring area Connection No 12 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 13 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 14 Accumula
99. up the UDP IP communications setting connection automatically opens and data send receive is enabled Program for open close processing is not required Point P When the open close processing is executed with a dedicated instruction from the Ethernet equipped module even if Do Not Open by Program is set in Opening Method under Own Node Settings in Basic Settings the open close processing after a connection with the external device is established must be executed by the program 224 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications Open by Program is set Before the open close request is received from the external device the Ethernet equipped module must execute the OPEN CLOSE instruction and enter the open close standby state Data can be sent and received after the open processing completes normally For OPEN CLOSE instruction refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Ex Open close processing for connection No 1 Parameter communications Power on completed Open status Open enable status closed Closed status Initial status Un G1900024 0 OPEN instruction OPEN instruction completion device OPEN instruction Abnormally ended completion device 1 1 e CLOSE instruction CLOSE instruction 1 completion device oo Abnormally CLOSE
100. with the dedicated instruction in the program Manufacturer Displays the name of the manufacturer of the device for which the protocol is being set Model Displays the model of the protocol to be set Protocol Name Displays the name of the protocol to be set Communication Type Displays the communication type of the protocol to be set Send only Sends one send packet once Receive only If there is a matching packet within up to 16 registered and received packets it is received Send amp receive After sending one send packet if there is a matching packet within up to 16 registered and received packets it is received Send Receive Packet Name Packet Setting Displays the packet send direction For send lt 1 to 16 For receive the received packet number is displayed in parentheses Displays the packet name Displays the validity of variables in the packet elements and the variable setting state If the variable is not set there are no elements or there is an element error the protocol is not written to the Ethernet equipped module No Variable When there is no variable in the elements Variable Set Only when all variables have been set Variable Unset When there is even one unset variable Elements Unset When there are no elements in an editable protocol Element Error When elements do not satisfy requirements 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol BAddi
101. with the external device Broadcast Send Broadcast Receive Fixed Buffer Procedure Exist 2 Fixed Buffer No Procedure 2 Random Access Buffer Predefined Protocol Socket Communication MELSOFT Connection SLMP Protocol Select the communication protocol for the external device TCP UDP Fixed Buffer Send Receive Setting For communications using a fixed buffer select whether to use the Send buffer for sending or for receiving in a connection to the external Receive device Pairing Receive Pairing Send PLC IP Address The IP address of the own node which is set in IP Address is displayed Port No Set the port number for each connection of the Ethernet equipped 1 to 4999 5010 to 65534 module Default Blank Sensor Device MAC Address The setting is not required Host Name The setting is not required IP Address Set the IP address of the external device 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 Default Blank Port No Set the port number of the external device 1 to 65534 65535 Set 65535 to set all the port numbers as the target of data receive Default Blank Subnet Mask The setting is not required Default Gateway The setting is not required Existence Confirmation Select the method of alive check which is performed when the Ethernet equipped module has not communicated with the external device for a certain period of time When the module ca
102. 0 2C6H 711 2C7H 712 2C8H 713 2C9H 714 2CAH 722 to 737 2D2H to 2E1H Predefined protocol setting data check area Predefined protocol setting data error information Number of registered predefined protocols Protocol number Setting type Packet number Element number Predefined protocol registration Do not write any data to System area Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system If the value in an area of one word in size becomes equal to or higher than 65536 the count stops at 65535 FFFFH APPENDICES APPENDIX 199 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 1e RJ71EN71 network type Q compatible Ethernet With the Q compatible Ethernet the same buffer memory addresses as the MELSEC Q series Ethernet interface module can be used excluding some addresses llBuffer memory addresses usable only with RJ71EN71 The following table lists the buffer memory addresses that can be used only with RJ71EN71 20700 to 20701 50DCH to 50DDH Forced connection invalidation Forced connection invalidation specification 20700 b0 to 15 Connection No 1 to 16 20701 60 Auto open UDP port 20701 b1 MELSOFT application transmission port UDP 20701 b2 MELSOFT application transmission port TCP 20701 b3 FTP transmission port 65535 FFFFH Network type information Network type information llBuffer memory addresses differing from MELSEC Q
103. 005189 1E98C5H status storage area 5190 1446H System area 2005190 1E98C6H 5191 1447H Hub connection status area Communication mode 2005191 1E98C7H 5192 1448H Connection status 2005192 1E98C8H 5193 1449H Communication speed 2005193 1E98C9H 5194 144AH Disconnection count 2005194 1E98CAH 5195 to 5199 144BH to 144FH System area 2005195 to 1E98CBH to 2005199 1E98CFH 5200 1450H IP address duplication status storage area Same IP address detection flag 2005200 1E98DOH 5201 to 5203 2005201 to 1451H to 1453H 1E98D1H to 2005203 1E98D3H 5204 to 5206 1454H to 1456H 2005204 to 1E98D4H to 2005206 1E98D6H MAC address of the station already connected to the network MAC address of the station with the IP address already used APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 193 5207 to 5300 1457H to 14B4H System area 2005207 to 1E98D7H to 2005300 1E9934H 5301 14B5H Area for sending instruction execution request 2005301 1E9935H receiving instructions 5302 to 5322 14B6H to 14CAH System area 2005302 to 1E9936H to 2005322 1E994AH 5323 14CBH Link dedicated instruction ZNRD instruction execution result 2005323 1E994BH 5324 14CCH System area 2005324 1E994CH 5325 14CDH ZNWR instruction execution result 2005325 1E994DH 5326 to 5625 14CEH to 15F9H System area 2005326
104. 1 Turning off the LED with the ERRCLEAR instruction 05 or later 240 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 11 Added and Enhanced Functions MEMO APPENDICES APPENDIX 241 Appendix 11 Added and Enhanced Functions INDEX A Instructions for communications using a fixed buffer ent d wed a ae he 217 Active Open 221 Instructions for predefined protocol communications Application data 0 UN 217 Area for sending receiving instructions 210 Intelligent function 14 ARP pene e e quuin dun aerea doa nM n 14 IP address ubt eee erue bsc tena 125 Automatic negotiation 132 IP address calculation system 143 Automatic response 142 IP address duplication status storage area 209 Auto open UDP 229 IP filter function 0 0 0 cee eee 113 IP filler 05 138 Combination system 146 J Command input monitoring timer 133 Jumbo frame 131 Communication data code 125 Communication 128 Communication path determination status 214 L Communication status 159 14 Communications by network number station number Link dedicated instructions 218 ene
105. 12EH connection could not be established in the open Check the operation of the external device processing Check if the open processing has been performed in the external device Correct the port number of the Ethernet equipped module IP address port number of the external device and opening method When the firewall is set in the external device check if the access is permitted Check if the Ethernet cable is disconnected 1133H The response send failed during socket communications Check the operation of the external device or switching or communications using a fixed buffer hub Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the connection cable is disconnected Check that there is no connection failure with the Switching hub Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module 1134H A TCP ULP timeout error has occurred in the TCP IP Check the operation of the external device communication The external device does not send an Correct the TCP ULP timeout value of the Ethernet ACK response equipped module Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the connection cable is disconnected 1152H IP address is not set
106. 20 IP address storage area write request Operations 1 Store the value to be changed SD1520 to 501525 IP address setting 2 Turm off and on SM1520 IP address storage area write request 3 Check the write results with the following special relays and special registers Device At normal completion At abnormal completion 5 1520 IP address storage area write request Off Off 5 1521 IP address storage area write error Off On 501526 IP address storage area writing error Stores the cause of the error cause 4 Power off and on or set the CPU module 5 IP address stored in the IP address storage area system memory is a valid value the stored IP address is set as the CPU module s IP address If the value is invalid or not set the value set in the module parameters is set as the CPU module s IP address 6 Check the IP address with the buffer memory 5 Page 197 CPU module 4 20 1 FUNCTIONS 1 11 IP Address Change Function Operation of special relays and special registers The following sections shows the operation of the special relays and special registers when writing to the IP address storage area system memory Operation at normal completion The system is powered off when writing was completed Write start write completed Write request ON SM1520 OFF 1 i Write error ON i SM1521 OFF r i 1 1 Write error cause 4 0
107. 3 module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure QA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom Communications using the predefined protocol cannot be performed When communications using the predefined protocol cannot be performed check the following items and take action Check item Action Is the IP address setting of the external device correct Check and correct the IP address of the external device Has the connection with the external device been opened Check Open If the connection with the external device is not opened perform the open completion signal Un G1900000 to Un G1900007 72 processing If an error occurs check and eliminate the error cause Has the send receive processing dedicated instruction for the If the send receive processing has not been executed check and correct communications using the predefined protocol been executed properly the execution condition of the send receive processing If send receive processing has completed with an error check the error code in the completion status and eliminate the error cause Is the appropriate protocol used for the external device in the predefined Correct the predefined protocol settings and program If inappropriate protocol protocol settings and program is used For appropriat
108. 87 Physical address and logical address of random access buffer When exchanging data with binary codes Specify the head address with a binary value 2 When exchanging data with ASCII codes Specify the ASCII code for expressing the start address as a hexadecimal m 4 bytes Data length setting Express the number of read write data words with the random access buffer range When exchanging data with binary codes Specify the number of words as a binary value Maximum 1017 words 2 bytes When exchanging data with ASCII codes Specify the ASCII code when expressing the number of words as a hexadecimal Maximum 508 words 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer When exchanging data with binary codes Data length maximum of 1017 words L H L H eseseeeees L 2 A A A Random access buffer Specified address n 1 2 set number of words to be read 1 word 2 bytes When exchanging data with ASCII codes Data length x 2 maximum of 1016 words H L H D s to L ey A ASCII binary conversion Random access buffer Specified address n 1 n set number of words to be read Maximum of 508 words 56H 78H 5 31H 32H 33H 35H 36H
109. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller series MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application RJ71EN71 RO4CPU RO8CPU RO8PCPU R16CPU R16PCPU R32CPU R32PCPU R120CPU R120PCPU SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels JN WARNING and A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in A WARNING death or severe injury A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under A CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the ent
110. 90 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 2 I O Signals Appendix 3 Buffer Memory The buffer memory is used for the following applications RJ71EN71 Exchanges data with the CPU module CPU module Stores data such as the setting values for the Ethernet function and monitor values and data used for exchanging data with the multiple CPU function Buffer memory values are defaulted when the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off List of buffer memory addresses The following table lists the buffer memory addresses when the network type of the RJ71ENT1 is set to Ethernet When setting Q Compatible Ethernet refer to the following C Page 200 When using the RJ71EN71 network type Q compatible Ethernet 0to3 OH to 3H System area 2000000 to 1E8480H to 2000003 1E8483H 4to5 4H to 5H Own node setting status Own node IP address 2000004 to 1E8484H to storage area 2000005 1E8485H 6 to 13 6H to DH System area 2000006 to 1E8486H to 2000013 1E848DH 14 to 15 EH to FH Subnet mask 2000014 to 1E848EH to 2000015 1E848FH 16to 17 10H to 11H System area 2000016 to 1E8490H to 2000017 1E8491H 18 to 19 12H to 13H Default gateway IP address 2000018 to 1E8492H to 2000019 1E8493H 20 to 27 14H to 1BH System area 2000020 to 1E8494H to 2000027 1E849BH 28 to 30 1CH to 1EH Own node MAC a
111. Access permit processing Unlock processing When remote password is set for the CPU module When connection for exchanging data with external device is set as a remote password check target Setting procedure Set External Device Configuration under Basic Settings 27 Page 127 External Device Configuration 1 Select SLMP Connection Module in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area 2 Setthe other items to the connection if required Communications using an auto open UDP port The auto open UDP port is used for communication with SLMP The auto open UDP port is a UDP IP port that automatically opens and closes at the following timing When this port is used communication is enabled when the initial processing is completed Communication can be performed without a program regardless of the connection s open status llOpen close timing After the Ethernet equipped module initial processing completes the port automatically opens according to the registered parameter settings The port automatically closes when the power for the Ethernet equipped module station turns off or is reset Point When the initial processing ends normally the Ethernet equipped module enables communications using an automatic open UDP port The module waits for a communication request to the Ethernet equipped module on the own station Automatic open The Ethernet equipped module accepts and processes requests fro
112. CH Connection No 6 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 6 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20625 5091H Connection No 7 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 7 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20630 5096H Connection No 8 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 8 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20635 509BH Connection No 9 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 9 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20640 50A0H Connection No 10 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 10 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20645 50A5H Connection No 11 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 11 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20650 50AAH Connection No 12 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 12 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20655 50AFH Connection No 13 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 13 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20660 50B4H Connection No 14 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 14 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20665 50B9H Connection No 15 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 15 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20670 50BEH Connection No 16 Accumulated count of unlock process Connection No 16 Remote password mismatch count abnormal end 20675 50C3H Auto open UDP port Auto open UDP port Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal en
113. CL Executes the protocol registered with the predefined protocol support function of the SP ECPRTCL engineering tool x O 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Protocol communication type The packets sent to the external device when a processing is executed and the external device s receive packets are registered in the protocol The packet elements set with the predefined protocol support function are the data section of the packets that are actually sent and received This section describes an example of the packet configuration For details on the packet elements refer to the following Page 230 Operation Image Data Structure of Predefined Protocol For TCP IP Header Maximum data length 2046 bytes lt gt Destination Sender s MAC MAC address address 5 Data 6 bytes 6 bytes le Ethernet header l TCP IP header gt For UDP IP Maximum data length 2046 bytes Destination Sender s Type IP UDP MAC address MAC address 2 bytes 20 bytes 8 bytes Data 6 bytes 6 bytes Ethernet header rle UDP IP header With the predefined protocol support function data is exchanged with the external device with the procedures communication type shown below For details on the communication type operation refer to the following Page 230 Operation Image and Data Stru
114. CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mit
115. CPU module The Interrupt Settings are required to use the interrupt program 27 Page 147 Interrupt Settings The following figure shows the receive processing for the fixed buffer No 2 area corresponding to the connection No 2 Initial processing Open processing Receiving data Sending a response Initial status Un G1900024 0 9 i i i Open completion signal connection No 2 i i i Un G1900000 1 i i BUFRCVS instruction i In interrupt processing i i i Receiving data ACK TCP only ACK Response TCP only Cycle Cycle 4 lt gt Program Scan i Tou Scan Interrupt processing Scan cies Normal completion of the initial processing is checked Initial status Un G1900024 0 On A connection is established with the RJ71EN71 and external device and normal completion of the connection No 2 open processing is checked L Page 219 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications The CPU module is requested to start the interrupt program and data is received from the external device Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection No 2 Un G1900016 1 On The interrupt program starts The BUFRCVS instruction is executed and the receive data length and receive data are read from the fixed buffer No 2 Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection No 2 Un G1900016 1 Off When reading of the receive data leng
116. Communication Communication Destination IP Displays the IP address of the sensor device to be connected which is set in the parameter settings Address Communication Destination Port No Displays the port number of the sensor device to be connected which is set in the parameter settings Latest Error Code Displays the error code that indicates the definition of latest error occurred Protocol Displays the protocol TCP IP or UDP IP Open System Displays the open method Active Unpassive or Fullpassive when the protocol of the connection is TCP IP TCP Status Displays the status open status of connection with the sensor device when the protocol of the connection status is TCPIIP Pairing Open Displays the setting status of pairing open when the communication method of the connection is the fixed buffer Existence Confirmation Displays the alive check method set in the parameter settings Remote Password Status Displays the remote password setting status Continuous Unlock Lost Counts Displays the total number of continuous failure of remote password unlock Force Deactivation Status Displays the status of forced invalidation specification 1 This item is displayed only for the RJ71EN71 2 This item is displayed only when the network type of the RJ71EN71 is set to Q Compatible Ethernet and MELSOFT Connection Module is set as an external device in External Device Configuration of Basic Settings Click the Clear Latest Er
117. ES APPENDIX 221 Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications Passive open procedure The following two types of connection methods can be used to Passive open the Ethernet equipped module Unpassive This connection method executes a passive open processing for the connection to all devices connected to the network without restriction to the IP address or port number of the communication destination Fullpassive When the IP address and port number of the communication destination are specified this connection method executes a passive open processing for the connection of the specific external device The open close processing procedure for Passive open follows the setting of Opening Method under Own Node Settings in Basic Settings 15 Page 125 Own Node Settings When Do Not Open by Program is set The Ethernet equipped module is constantly in the open standby state so the connection is established when Active open is initiated by the external device This eliminates the need for an open close processing program on the Ethernet equipped module side Ex Open close processing for connection No 1 Parameter communications Power on Completed o Open status Open enable status closed Active open acceptance enabled Closed status Initial status Un G1900024 0 Open completion signal O connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 Open request signal connection No 1
118. H MELSOFT connection UDP port number 86 56H MELSOFT direct connection port number 130 to 145 82H to 91H Connection status Connection No 1 latest error code to Connection No 16 latest error code storage area 146 92H System port latest error FTP server latest error code 147 93H code storage area MELSOFT direct connection latest error code 150 to 151 96H to 97H Status for each protocol IP packet Received packet total count 152 to 153 98H to 99H Received packet checksum error discard count 154 to 155 9AH to 9BH Sent packet total count 172 to 173 ACH to ADH Simultaneous transmission error detection count Receive buffer full count 182 to 183 B6H to B7H ICMP packet Received packet total count 184 to 185 B8H to B9H Received packet checksum error discard count 186 to 187 BAH to BBH Sent packet total count 188 to 189 BCH to BDH Received echo request total count 190 to 191 BEH to BFH Sent echo replay total count 192 to 193 COH to C1H Sent echo request total count 194 to 195 C2H to C3H Received echo reply total count 196 to 197 C4H to C5H TCP packet Received packet total count 198 to 199 C6H to C7H Received packet checksum error discard count 200 to 201 C8H to C9H Sent packet total count 204 to 205 CCH to CDH UDP packet Received packet total count 206 to 207 CEH to CFH Received packet checksum error discard count 208 to 209 DOH to D1H Sent packet total count 224 to 225 EOH to E1H Receiving error Framing error count 226 to 227 E2
119. H to E3H Receive FIFO overflow count 228 to 229 E4H to E5H CRC error count APPENDICES APPENDIX 197 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 242 F2H Own node operation Hub connection status area Communication mode 243 F3H Status storage area Connection status 244 F4H Communication speed 245 F5H Disconnection count 251 FBH IP address duplication status storage area Same IP address detection flag 252 to 254 FCH to FEH MAC address of the station already connected to the network 255 to 257 to 101H MAC address of the station with the IP address already used 270 10EH Remote password lock Remote password lock status connection No 1 to 16 271 10FH statis siorage arsa Remote password lock status system port 280 118H Forced connection Forced connection invalidation connection No 1 to 16 invalidation setting area 281 119H Forced connection invalidation system port 290 122H Time setting function Time setting function operation result 291 123H SNTP area Time setting function execution time Year 292 124H Month 293 125H Day 294 126H Hour 295 127H Minute 296 128H Second 297 129H Day of the week 298 12AH Time setting function required response time 299 12BH Time setting function SNTP client execution 310 to 311 136H to 137H IP p
120. IP communications a connection is established during communication Since data is exchanged while checking that the data has correctly reached the communication destination the data reliability can be ensured Note that the line load is larger than UDP IP communications When the Ethernet equipped module is Passive open Server Client F 20 Open request _ Response 7 Connection Passive open Active open Ethernet equipped module 222 Ran External device APPENDICES APPENDIX 21 9 Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications Communications Communication flow This section describes the flow from the establishment of connection to end of communication Server Client Ethernet equipped module External device After performing Passive open the server will wait for an open request Passive open When the client sends an Active open request Open request and the server accepts it Active open a connection is established between the client and the server Response mBuREEEEEERHEEEEEEEEEENE Connection established Connection established Data sending B di The client requests data M ata sending sending and sends data The client receives the response Receive processing to the data Data sending Data sending
121. If the external device is not powered on power it on Does any error occur in the external device hub router or other devices If an error occurs refer to the manual for each device and take action Does the protocol TCP IP or UDP IP match with that of the external device Is the access from the external device set to be denied in IP Filter Settings under Security of Application Settings Correct the parameters so that the protocol matches with that of the external device 25 Page 127 External Device Configuration If the access from the external device is denied change the setting so that the access is permitted Page 138 IP Filter Settings Was a device on the line such as an Ethernet equipped module external device hub and router replaced with the one with the same IP address If a device was replaced take any of the following actions Wait for update of the ARP cache waiting time varies depending on the device Restart all the devices on the line Is the IP address of the external device specified correctly Execute a PING test to the IP address of the external device If the existence of the external device cannot be checked network configuration is incorrect Consult with the system or network manager Is Module Operation Mode of Application Settings set to other mode than Online 4 Set Module Operation Mode of Application Settings to Online 27 Page 148 Modu
122. METER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings Gateway Information Gateway IP Address When communicating with an external device on another Ethernet network through a gateway other than the default gateway set the IP address of the gateway Setting range 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 Set a value that satisfies the following conditions IP address class is any of A The subnet address of the gateway is the same as that of the Ethernet equipped module on the own station The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 Point When the Ethernet equipped module communicates with an external device on another Ethernet network by Passive open communication is possible without gateway parameter settings In a system where the Proxy router is used the gateway parameter settings are not required lelSubnet Address When communicating with an external device on another Ethernet network through a gateway other than the default gateway set the network address or subnet address 2 of the external device Setting range 0 0 0 1 to 255 255 255 254 Set a value that satisfies the following conditions The IP address class is any of A B and C The host address bits are all O 1 Setthe network address of the external device when its class network address is different from that of the Ethernet equipped module on the own station 2 Setthe network address of the external device when its class network addres
123. Maximum of 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 1016 words A Y Dd Ww Text EA Data length command Communication Subheader Start address setting none at read request source i L s0Hj3on L H eauest ES Communication response request destination Subheader End code none at write H L H L request v A y J 2 byte 2 byte Maximum of 1016 words v Application data area Response MSubheader The RJ71EN71 automatically adds and deletes the header so it does not need to be set b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 1 bO ee oo 1 1 00H Only for command not for response Command response type When communications are performed using the random access buffer this format is used For data read 61H For data write 62H Command response flag For command 0 For response 1 88 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer During read Binary code b7 bO b7 0 1 1 0 07 0 07 7 1 1 1 1 0 0707071 MY Pec Subheader Subheader ASCII code b7 bo b7 0111110 0i0i0 1 1 1 1 0 0707071 6 4 gt 6H 1 4 1H E 4 gt EH 1 4 1H 36H 31H 30H 31H Subheader Subheader 1 FUNCTIONS 89 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer 90 Start Address The start address of the random access buffer range where data read write is executed is expressed as a logical address Page
124. NS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer Physical address and logical address of random access buffer This section describes the start address of the RJ71EN71 random access buffer specified in the command The address specified for the random access buffer differs from the address specified by the external device and the address specified with the FROM TO instruction Physical address Address specified with program s FROM TO instruction Logical address Address specified by external device in start address item of command Physical address Buffer memory areas Logical address 20000 0 Random access buffer 26143 6143 Precautions The following section lists the precautions for communications using the random access buffer Precautions for programming Hinitial processing and open processing completion The initial processing and connection open processing must be completed llSend request from CPU module Send cannot be requested from the CPU module Completion of sending to CPU module is not checked If the data send receive must be synchronized between the CPU module and external device use fixed buffer communication MRandom access buffer address The address specified by the external device is different from the address specified with the FROM TO instruction For details refer to the following E Page 87 Physical address and logical address of random access buffer Data Format The commun
125. Name Packet Type send Packet Packet Name 3 Element Setting 5400 28 pte DO0 D lfFised Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 0000 28 ute Non conversion Variable Static Data Non conversion Variable Network No D 1 D1 fFised Length 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Station No D 2 D2 fFised Length 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Requested module 1 0 D 3 D3lfFised Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data For future expansion DO 1Byte Length Request data length Object element9 14 HEX Reverse 2Byte Non conversion Variable Monitoring timer D4 D4 Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data Command 0104 2B yte Static Data Subcommand 0000 28 pte Non conversion Variable Head device No D5 DB fFixed Length 3Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Device code D7 D7 Fixed Length 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Number of device points Change Type Add New Paste Delete er Byte No Swap Normal response Protocol No 1 Protocol Name 0401 Read word Packet Type Receive Packet Packet Name Normal response Element Type Element Name E
126. P Client Time information is collected from the time information server SNTP server connected on the LAN at the specified timing and the CPU module s time is automatically set Time query a LAN Setting server time in the CPU module Ethernet Personal computer 1 FUNCTIONS 111 1 9 Time Setting Function SNTP Client This setting is not available when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet Point An SNTP server time information server must be provided on the LAN line to use this function Time setting execution timing Time setting is executed in the following timing At powering off and on resetting the CPU module At each set time execution at set cycle interval At set time execution at set time At programmed arbitrary timing 1 The time is set when Time setting function SNTP client execution Un G11009 0 is turned on Point When setting the time at the CPU module power on or reset check the hub or external device connection before setting Setting procedure Set with Time Setting SNTP client under Application Settings 2 Page 134 Time Setting Confirming the execution results The time setting execution results can be checked with the following module label Operation result UnXG11000 e Ex
127. Please consult your local Mitsubishi Slot No representative CPU No 24C3H An error was detected on the system bus Take measures to reduce noise System configuration Reset the CPU module and run it again If the error information occurs again even after taking the above the possible No cause is a hardware failure of the module base unit or Base No extension cable Please consult your local Mitsubishi Slot No representative CPU No 24C6H An error was detected on the system bus Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the error occurs again even after taking the above the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module base unit or extension cable Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3020H A value of the port number is out of range Check the each system port number registered in the buffer memory If the error occurs again even after taking the above the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3040H Response data of the dedicated instruction cannot be Increase the request interval created Decrease the number of request nodes Wait for a response to the previous request before sending the next request Correct the timeout value 3060H The send receive data size exceeds the allowable range Check and change the send data size of the Ethernet equipped modu
128. Precautions for TCP IP communications Conditions for closing In addition to when close is requested from the external device the TCP IP communications processing will be closed in the following cases if Open completion signal Un G1900000 to Un G1900007 turns off When alive check function times out When forced close is received from external device connection elements The TCP IP connection is managed with the following four elements Only one connection containing the same four elements can be created at one time To use multiple TCP IP connections simultaneously ensure that one of the four elements is different P address of the Ethernet equipped module side Port number of the Ethernet equipped module side P address of the external device side Port number of the external device side MReconnecting with same connection After closing the connection during TCP IP communications wait at least 500ms before reconnecting to a connection with the same external device IP address own station port number and external device port number If a wait interval cannot be provided before reconnecting changing the own station port number on the Active open side and connecting is recommended 56 1 FUNCTIONS 1 4 Socket Communications llChecking the receive data length There is no concept of delimiting the exchanged data during communication with TCP IP Thus the continuously sent data may be merged on the
129. Refresh Data 00B Data Refresh FB 0 MEAS bRunRefres s ON h SM400 Mo 1 Bii bEN o bENO B EN71 E E1 PH DUT i_stModule RCPU stS M_RJ71EN7 MbAlway 1 S s_ON ocket 01A 1 68 5 pbi_bReadTi SM400 ming d H 1 FUNCTIONS 83 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 71 EN7IEE 1 0 1 bnCom 1 bnComp bStartRe P letion Re bRecv_O bStartRecv etion Eth letion Co gt bRecv_NG cv ceiveSoc FB ernetlniti nnection ket Fixed 98 alized 0 1 Buffer 1 9 Mii M12 M17 H m 4 MAE dA o 4 M_RJ71EN71_EE Recv Socket 01A 1 M RJ71EN71_EE Socket 01A Receive Socket FB 108 petere bRunRecv M17 M10 1 Bii bEN o bENO B bRecv_OK 71 E1 11 4 stModule 0 bOK B O bRecv_NG 12 4 UWiuConnectionNo 0 0 uRecvEr nD D20 uRecvD ata o_uRecvData UW D2000 pbi bReadTiming 0 206 END 0 The refresh processing of the module label is performed The processing is required for when using the module function block When the refresh processing is completed bRunRefresh MO is turned on 98 When bStartRecv M9 is turned on the data sent from the sending side is received and stored in uRecvData 02000 The device range in which dat
130. SEN l c 125 Lock 0 116 Connection status 157 Logical address 87 Connection status storage area 208 Login name 133 Control CPU sada uus bie Rubr ERR ed 14 Creating the protocol setting data 29 M D MELSECNET 10 14 SSS MELSECNET H 14 Device 14 MELSOFT application communication port TCP IP Drive name drive jc 229 MELSOFT application communication port UDP IP Sia a cnet RSD HA Bg Fasc 229 S oS MELSOFT application direct connection 229 Enable disable online change 125 MELSOFT connection UDP port 97 End 186 Module communication test 148 153 Engineering 1 14 Module 151 Error 151 Module information list 152 Ethernet diagnostics 154 Module label 44 Ethernet equipped module 14 Existence 129 N F Network 125 No proced re i i 2 eo re SE Sr 60 Fixed bu
131. Set the data length of the 5 For a variable length set t The range is 1 to 2046 end receive data he maximum data length that can be specified for the data length storage area Unit of Stored Data Lower byte Upper byte When sending Each one word 2 bytes data in the data storage area is sent in the order of the lower byte to the upper byte When receiving The receive data is stored to the data storage area in the order of the lower byte to the upper byte Lower Bytes Only When sending Each lower byte data in the data storage area is sent The Ethernet equipped module ignores the upper byte data When receiving The receive data is stored to each lower byte in the data storage area The Ethernet equipped module stores 00H in the upper byte Byte Swap Disable Lower gt Upper Enable Upper gt Lower When sending When Enable Upper Lower is selected data in the upper byte and lower byte are swapped by one word 2 bytes and sent When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the upper byte is sent at transmission of the last byte When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only and Data Length is an odd number of bytes data without any byte swap is sent at transmission of the last byte When receiving When Enable Upper Lower is selected data the upper byte and lower byte are swapped by word and sent When Unit of Stored
132. U 8178 byte 9KB MTU 9004 byte Default Disable MTU 1500 byte not efficient because the frame size is too small 3KB AKB 5KB 6KB 1 This setting is not available when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet Jumbo Frame The following describes the precautions for using jumbo frames In TCP IP communications the setting is enabled when the external device supports jumbo frames If the external device does not support jumbo frames the Ethernet equipped module sends data in normal frame size even though the Jumbo Frame is enabled In TCP IP communications data sending from the external device may fail when jumbo frame setting of the Ethernet equipped module is set to Disable MTU 1500 byte and that of the external device is enabled When communicating in jumbo frames enable the jumbo frame setting for both of the Ethernet equipped module and external device In UDP IP communications the Ethernet equipped module sends data in jumbo frames according to the Jumbo Frame even though the external device does not support jumbo frames When the hub on the communication path does not support jumbo frames the Ethernet equipped module cannot communicate with the external device because the hub discards the packets even if the module sends data in jumbo frame Data can be sent in jumbo frames only when the transmission speed is 1Gbps When Automatic Negotiation in Communication Sp
133. Un G5200 Same IP address detection flag Stores IP address duplication status 0 IP address not duplicated 1 IP address duplicated Un G5201 to Un G5203 MAC address of the station already connected to the Stores the MAC address of the station that has been network already connected to the network in the station with duplicated IP address Un G5201 5th byte 6th byte of the MAC address Un G5202 3rd byte 4th byte of the MAC address Un G5203 1st byte 2nd byte of the MAC address FFFFFFFFFFFFH is stored in the station that has been already connected to the network Un G5204 to Un G5206 MAC address of the station with the IP address already Stores the MAC address of the station with duplicated IP used address in the station that has been already connected to the network Un G5204 5th byte 6th byte of the MAC address Un G5205 3rd byte 4th byte of the MAC address Un G5206 1st byte 2nd byte of the MAC address FFFFFFFFFFFFH is stored in the station with duplicated IP address APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 209 foi ng instructions instruction execution request Un G5301 Un G5301 Stores the instruction execution request status of each channel in bO to b7 channel 1 to 8 On Requesting Off No request Link dedicated instruction Un G5323 to Un G5325 The execution result of the link dedicated instruction is stored Un G5323 ZNRD instruction execution result Store
134. When multiple errors occur the error status is displayed in the order of major moderate and minor Point For the RJ71EN71 whether the error occurs in the P1 or P2 be checked with P ERR LED When the RUN LED or READY LED turns off When the READY LED of the CPU module turns off after power on refer to the troubleshooting of the CPU module LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application When the RUN LED of the RJ71ENT71 turns off check the following Is the Ethernet equipped module mounted correctly Securely mount the Ethernet equipped module on the base unit If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure 257 Page 153 Module communication test When the ERROR LED or ERR LED turns on or is flashing When the ERROR LED of the CPU module turns on or is flashing perform the module diagnostics of the CPU module 72 Diagnostics gt Module Diagnostics CPU Diagnostics When the ERR LED of the RJ71EN71 turns on or is flashing identify the error cause using the engineering tool 5 Page 151 Checking the Module Status If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure 257 Page 153 Module communication test 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 1 Checking with LED 1 49 1 the SD RD LED does not turn on at data sending When the SD RD LED does not turn on at data sending check the followin
135. a area before protocol execution C Enable C Disable Receive Wait Time 0 x100ms Setting Range 0 to 30000 0 Infinite Wait r Send Setting Number of Send Retries Times Setting Range 0 to 10 Send Retry Interval 1015 Setting Range 0 to 30000 Standby Time 0 x10ms Setting Range 0 to 30000 Monitoring Time 100ms Setting Range 0 to 3000 0 Infinite Wait Communication Parameter Batch Setting Cancel Connected Device Manufacturer Set the protocol maker name Information Type Set the protocol device type Model Set the protocol model Version Set the protocol device version Description Set a description of the protocol device Protocol setting Protocol No The protocol number for the selected protocol is displayed ELT information Protocol Name Set the protocol name Communication Type Set the protocol communication type Receive Setting Receive Wait Time Set the time for wait after the module enters the receive data wait state If communication with the external device is disabled because of a disconnection and matching packet data is not received within the specified time the module judges that an error has occurred and cancels the receive data wait state Send Setting Send Wait Time Set the time to wait from when the protocol set for the module enters the execution state to when the data is actually sent The time for the external device to enter the re
136. a is stored varies depending on the data length of the received data When the data receive is completed successfully bRecv_OK M11 is turned on Point Secure sufficient device areas according to the maximum length of data sent from the send source to prevent the device areas used for other purposes from being overwritten by the receive data When the data receive is consecutively executed turn on pbi bReadTiming read timing as shown in the above program To receive data at shorter intervals than the scan time of the CPU module add the normally closed contact of pRecv_OK M11 and bRecv_NG M12 to the execution conditions of FB for receiving as shown in the above program When there is no normally closed contact of bRecv M11 and bRecv NG M12 bStartRecvFB M17 is not turned off and on and the FB for receiving may not be executed 84 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer With communication using the random access buffer data can be freely read and written between an arbitrary external device excluding Ethernet equipped module the RJ71EN71 The external device does not need to be fixed The random access buffer is used as the common buffer area for external devices connected to the Ethernet External Writing device Reading Writing External device Reading RJ 71EN71 R Writing d acc
137. acket transfer IP packet transfer latest data volume 312 to 313 138H to 139H function area IP packet transfer maximum data volume 320 to 335 140H to 14FH Remote password Connection No 1 continuous unlock failure count to Connection No 16 continuous function monitoring area unlock failure count 336 150H Auto open UDP port continuous unlock failure count 337 151H MELSOFT transmission port UDP IP continuous unlock failure count 338 152H MELSOFT transmission port TCP IP continuous unlock failure count 339 153H FTP transmission port TCP IP continuous unlock failure count 340 154H MELSOFT direct connection continuous unlock failure count 350 15EH Predefined protocol Connection No 1 Protocol execution status 351 15FH support function System area execution status check 352 to 367 160H to 16FH area Received data verification result receive packet No 1 to 16 368 170H Protocol execution count 369 171H Protocol cancellation specification 370 to 669 172H to 29DH Connection No 2 to Connection No 16 680 2A8H Open completion signal Open completion signal 681 2A9H Open request signal Open request signal 682 2AAH Socket communications Socket communications reception status signal reception status signal 683 2ABH Initial status Initial status 684 2ACH Initial error code Initial error code 692 2B4H Predefined protocol Predefined protocol ready support function check area 198 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 71
138. age area 1 Send packet Data storage area Data storage area Receive Data storage area packet gt n T For send packet Send data is stored by the program For receive packet Receive data is stored by the Ethernet equipped module 1 The data length unit is byte fixed Point When Fixed Length Variable Length is Variable Length and the configuration is set as follows an error OCCUIS An element other than static data is placed behind a non conversion variable element when non conversion variable is out of the length calculating range or when there is no length element except for when non conversion variable is placed at the end of the packet elements Multiple non conversion variable elements are placed in the length calculating range while a length element is not placed A non conversion variable element is placed before a length element in the length calculating range 1 FUNCTIONS 40 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Non verified reception Element Name Data Length 0 Setting Range 0 to 2046 0 Variable Use this when receive data include unnecessary data If the receive packet contains non verified reception Ethernet equipped module skims over the specified number of characters Multiple non verified reception elements can be set in one packet The following table lists the items Item Description Remarks Element Name Set th
139. al device to Pairing Receive Set the other parameters required for communication in the connection Select the same external device as step 1 from the Unit List and drag to the next connection number of the external device set in step 1 6 Set Communication Method for the external device to the same as the external device set in step 1 7 Set the Fixed Buffer Send Receive Setting with the external device to Pairing 8 Set the other parameters to the same values as the external device set in Step 1 Set Pairing Receive to connection No 1 to 7 or No 9 to 15 Point The external devices with which data can be exchanged with pairing open are those in the Ethernet to which RJ71EN71 is connected and devices connected via a router The open close processing for the next connection send connection is executed automatically using the open close processing on the receive connection side set to pairing open 1 FUNCTIONS 69 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 70 Broadcast communications Broadcast communications is a communication method that does not specify the external device Data is exchanged between all Ethernet equipped module stations and external devices on the same Ethernet to which the Ethernet equipped modules are connected Item Description Broadcast sending The same data is sent to all Ethernet devices on the same Ethernet Broadcast receiving Th
140. and on the hub Is there any source of noise near the module or cables Change the location of the module or cables If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure 257 Page 153 Module communication test 150 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 1 Checking with LED 3 2 Checking the Module Status The following table lists the functions which can be used in the Module Diagnostics window of the Ethernet equipped module Error Information Displays the details of the errors currently occurring Click the Event History button to check the history of errors that have occurred on the network errors detected for each module and operations that have been executed Module information list Displays various status information of the Ethernet equipped module Supplementary Function Ethernet Diagnostics Enables checking the cause to resolve the problem when an error occurs in the Ethernet system Page 154 Checking the Network Status Check the details of the error currently occurring and action to remove the error A stop error was detected in the CPU module of an engineering Check the error of the CPU module and take corrective action using the module diagnostics tool Status Major An error such as hardware failure or memory failure The module stops operating Moderate An error such as paramet
141. annot be searched connected to a router The CPU module connected via a router cannot be searched Modify the connection to search the CPU module Is the CPU module cannot be searched connected with wireless LAN Perform the search again The packet may be lost Is the service processing such as file read load of the search target CPU module high Increase the response waiting time and perform the search again Reduce the service processing load of the CPU module 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 163 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 164 Communications using SLMP cannot be performed When communications using SLMP cannot be performed check the following items Check item Action Has the connection with the external device been opened Check Open completion signal Un G1900000 to Un G1900007 1 2 If the connection with the external device is not opened perform the open processing If an error occurs check and eliminate the error cause 15 the correct command format used for the command type device address and others Correct the command format LA SLMP Reference Manual 15 Enable Disable Online Change under Own Node Settings in Basic Settings set to Disable If Enable Disable Online Change is set to Disable change the setting to Enable I Page 125 Own Node Settings Did the external device send a command If the device did not send a command send a command to
142. application Accumulated count of transmission port TCP unlock process normal completion 20686 50CEH Accumulated count of lock process normal completion 20687 50CFH Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end 20688 Accumulated count of lock process based on close 20689 50D1H FTP transmission port Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 20691 50D3H Accumulated count of lock process normal completion 20692 50D4H Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end 20693 50D5H Accumulated count of lock process based on close 20737 to 20855 5101H to HTTP status storage area 5177H 20992 to 20995 5200H to Issue system switching request at disconnection detection status storage area 5203H 21008 to 21009 5210H to 5211H System switching settings when communication error occurs status storage area 22640 to 24575 5870H to E mail status storage area 5FFFH For details on other buffer memory addresses that can be used in the RJ71EN71 refer to the following Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic 206 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Details of buffer memory addresses This section descries the buffer memory of the Ethernet equipped module The following buffer memory addresses for when the P1 connecter of the RJ71EN71 is used vn node 1g us storage area Own node address Un G4 to Un G5 The IP address set with the module parameter is stored
143. ata With this the external device can monitor the operation of the Ethernet equipped module analyze data and control production Device global label of the CPU module connected with the RJ71EN71 When the Ethernet function of the RJ71EN71 is used Device or global label of the CPU module When the Ethernet function of the CPU module is used Buffer memory of the intelligent function module File read write Files such as programs and parameters stored in the CPU module can be read written The CPU module files can be managed with the external device the execution file and others can be exchanged from the external device 1 FUNCTIONS 23 1 2 SLMP Communications 24 Remote control of a CPU module A CPU module can be remotely controlled from the external device using remote operations Remote password lock unlock The remote password can be locked and unlocked from the external device Access to the programmable controller on another station via other network In systems with CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet the programmable controller on another station can be accessed from the external device via the network Communication structure When a message is sent from the external device to the Ethernet equipped module using the SLMP message format the Ethernet equipped module executes a processing corresponding to the received message During c
144. atest value byte s of the total size byte per unit time 1 second of the transferred IP address The low order 16 bit value is stored in the 1st word and the high order 16 bit value is stored in the 2nd word Range 0 to 4294967295 FFFFFFFFH The value is 4294967295 FFFFFFFFH if the above value is exceeded IP packet transfer maximum data volume Un G11052 to Un1G11053 Un1G11052 to UnG11053 Stores the maximum value byte s of the total size byte per unit time 1 second of the transferred IP packet The low order 16 bit value is stored in the 1st word and the high order 16 bit value is stored in the 2nd word Range 0 to 4294967295 FFFFFFFFH The value is 4294967295 FFFFFFFFH if the above value is exceeded APPENDICES APPENDIX 213 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory routing function area Communication path determination status Un G11500 to Un G11514 The determination status of the communication path for each network number of the destination station is stored 0 Path undetermined 1 Path determined Un G11500 m 6 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Un G11514 Empty 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225 The numbers in the table indicate network numbers ssword function monitoring area The number of times each connection and system port remote password unlocking failed continuously is counted in the range
145. ations UDP IP Communications The program writes the data into the RJ71EN71 random access buffer The read request is sent from the external device to the RJ71EN71 asynchronously from the above processing RJ71EN71 side Receives command When the read request is received from the external device the RJ71EN71 sends the data written into the random access buffer to the external device RJ71EN71 side Sends response The connection is closed when communication is finished Procedure for writing from external device The following figure shows the procedure for writing data from the external device to the RJ71EN71 random access buffer 1 After the module parameters are set check that the RJ71EN71 initial processing has completed normally Initial status Un G1900024 0 On 2 The open processing is executed to establish a connection between the RJ71EN71 and external device Page 219 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications 3 Data is written from the external device to the RJ71EN71 random access buffer RJ71EN71 side Receives command 4 The RJ71EN71 executes the write processing requested by the external device and returns the write results to the external device that sent the write request RJ71EN71 side Sends response 5 The data written in the random access buffer is read asynchronously from the above the processing by the program 6 Close the connection when communication is finished 1 FUNCTIO
146. b connection status area Hub connection status area Communication mode b9 Communication mode b9 0 Half duplex 0 Half duplex 1 Full duplex 1 Full duplex Hub connection status b10 Hub connection status b10 0 Hub not connected disconnected 0 Hub not connected disconnected 1 Hub connected 1 Hub connected Data transmission speed b15 b14 Data transmission speed b15 b14 00 Operating at 1OBASE T 00 Operating at 1OBASE T 01 Operating at 100BASE TX 01 Operating at 100BASE TX 10 Operating at 1000BASE T 202 CAH Switch status Operational mode setting Module operation mode setting 0 Online 0 Online mode 1 Offline 1 Offline mode 2 Self loopback test 4 Module communication test mode 3 Hardware test 203 CBH Status of settings with a programming tool Status of settings with a programming tool Initial value OH Initial value 100H Communication data code setting b1 Communication data code setting b1 0 Communications in a binary code 0 Communications in a binary code 1 Communications in an ASCII code 1 Communications in an ASCII code Initial open method setting b2 Send frame setting b5 0 No parameter setting startup according to the sequence 0 Ethernet fixed program Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 1 Parameter setting startup according to the parameters 0 Disable TCP existence confirmation setting b4 1 Enable 0 Use the Ping Opening method b8 1 Use the KeepAlive 0 Open by program Send
147. c Settings 25 Page 127 External Device Configuration 1 Selectthe external device to be connected in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area UDP Connection Module Select to communicate with the external device using UDP IP Active Connection Module Select to perform the open processing to the external device from the Ethernet equipped module Active open and communicate using TCP IP Unpassive Connection Module Select to receive the open processing from a unspecified external device Unpassive open and communicate Select to receive the open processing from the specified external device Fullpassive open and communicate using TCP IP Fullpassive Connection Module using TCP IP 2 Procedure 3 Setthe Fixed Buffer Send Receive Setting 4 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Set the other parameters required for communication in the connection Set Communication Method for the external device to Fixed Buffer Procedure Exist or Fixed Buffer No Applicable dedicated instructions The following table lists the dedicated instructions used for communications using a fixed buffer For details on dedicated instructions refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks List of dedicated instructions The following table lists the dedicated instructions used by each module Instr
148. ce 2 IP address Class A Subnet address setting value Ex Own station IP address Class B 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Subnet mask T 05H 29H 02H IP address Class 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 7 Set the subnet address of the external device 3 Subnet address Subnet address setting value 1 0 0 010 01 01 110 0 01 010 1 01 11 01 0 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings Network Station No lt gt IP information setting Set to communicate with another network module by network number and station number Communication in Ethernet is performed according to the IP address and UDP port number and access to another network is performed according to the network number and station number Therefore when the RJ71EN71 accesses another network the IP address and UDP port number must be converted into the network number and station number of another network Setting System Select the system to obtain the IP address and port number of the external Automatic Response System device from its network number and station number Page 141 Setting Address Calculation System System Table Conversion System Combination System Default Automatic Response System Subnet Mask Pattern Set the subnet mask pattern 2 Page 146 Subnet Mask Pattern Blank 0 0 0 1 to 255 255 255 255 Default Blank C
149. ce Factor is set to SEND Instruction Data Reception set to 8 the number of the channel which receives send data Reception Connection 1 to 64 When Interrupt Occurrence Factor is set to Reception Connection Default Blank set the number of the connection which receives send data Detection Method The detection method for the interrupt condition is displayed when Edge Interrupt Occurrence Factor is set Default Blank Interrupt Pointer Set an interrupt pointer device 1 to be used for a program Device 10 to 115 150 to 11023 Default Blank Comment Set a comment for the interrupt pointer used if required 256 one byte characters maximum Default Blank 1 When Compatible Ethernet is selected in the network type the setting range is 1 to 16 2 Aninterrupt program is started when the receive data is stored in the channel or connection specified in Channel No Connection No 3 When selecting SEND Instruction Data Reception set Communications by Network No Station No under Own Node Settings of Basic Settings to Enable and set the network number and station number Point Maximum number of interrupt settings can be set to one module sum of the settings for the P1 connector and the P2 connector is 16 Setting number of the interrupt settings is shared in P1 connector and P2 connector For example when 5100 is set on the P1 connector side 5100 on the P2 connector
150. ce kek ae eae rere 188 Appendix 2 VO Signals 525 2 Rcx Rom agre mudo ed Rem mE PG EE 189 Listof VO signals isse pb PEE E Up uda E RACE EUR E E vat Ed e o 189 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 22 err E taeda dae Re eRe 191 List of buffer memory 4 191 Details of buffer memory addresses 207 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instruction 217 Precautions for dedicated 4 218 Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications UDP IP 219 TCP IP communications 0 219 UDP P COMMUNICALIONS e denen edo de dote lere aia d es e 224 Appendix 6 Communications with Different 226 Appendix 7 Processing Time 2 4 2 Rem ERR Rm o eee bey ae ame Rn een 228 Appendix 8 Port Numbers Used by Ethernet equipped 229 Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined 230 Operati
151. ceive enable state can be adjusted with this in respect to the module s send timing 1 The setting cannot be changed if the protocol was selected from the predefined protocol library Send receive parameters can be set for multiple protocols by clicking the Communication Parameter Batch Setting button and setting the range of the set protocol numbers receive settings and send settings 32 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol setting Set the configuration of the send receive packets on the Packet Setting window 722 Protocol Setting window gt Packet to be set Element Type Protocol No 1 Protocol Name Packet Type Send Packet Packet Name Element Name 0401 Read word Request Element Setting Static Data Fixed data 5400 28 Non conversion Variable Serial No Variable unset error Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data Fixed data 0000 28 pte Non conversion Variable Network No Variable unset error Fixed Length 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Station No Variable unset error Fixed Length 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Requested module 1 0 Variable unset error Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data For future expansion 0011 Byte Length Request data length Object element9 14 HEX Reverse
152. ceives an Active open request again from the external device with a different IP address or a port number 3 module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure QA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom Communications using the random access buffer cannot be performed When communications using the random access buffer cannot be performed check the following items and take action Check item Action Has the connection with the external device been opened Check Open completion signal Un G1900000 to UnG1900007 1 2 If the connection with the external device is not opened perform the open processing If an error occurs check and eliminate the error cause Did the external device send a command Send a command to the Ethernet equipped module from the external device 15 the correct buffer memory address specified for the command If the specified buffer memory address is incorrect correct it and send the command again Has data been set in the specified address of the random access buffer If any data has not been set write the data Has the write data been set in the external device If any write data has not been set set the data Was a response returned to the device that had sent the command If no response was retur
153. ces to be read written from to is Check and correct the specified start device and the number of points incorrect 50H Codes for the command response type of a subheader are not within Check and correct the command response type set for the external the specifications device Because the Ethernet equipped module automatically adds In communications using a fixed buffer if the data length setting is the command response type the user setting is not required smaller than the actual data amount the remaining data is processed Check and correct the data length as the second data In this case a subheader undefined command type error may occur 51H In communications using the random access buffer the start address Check and correct the specified start address specified by an external device has been set outside the range from 0 to 6143 52H In communications using the random access buffer the start address Check and correct the start address and the number of data words and the number of data words depending on the setting when reading Correct the number of read write points data specified by an external device exceeds the range from 0 to 6143 Data by the number of words specified text cannot be sent in one frame The data length value or the amount of the text sent received are not in the allowable range 54H When ASCII has been selected in the Communication Data Code Check and correct the data sent from the external d
154. col This protocol is used to transfer data files over a network Global label A label that is enabled for all program data when creating multiple program data in the project There are two types of global labels module label that is automatically generated by GX Works3 and label that can be created for the any of the specified devices ICMP The abbreviation for Internet Control Message Protocol This protocol is used to exchange messages of errors in an IP network or other information related to an Ethernet network Intelligent function module A module that has functions other than input and output such as an A D converter module and D A converter module Label A label that represents a device in a given character string MELSECNET 10 The abbreviation for the MELSECNET 10 network system MELSECNET H The abbreviation for the MELSECNET H network system Module label A label that represents one of memory areas I O signals and buffer memory areas specific to each module in a given character string GX Works3 automatically generates this label which can be used as a global label Network module A generic term for the following modules Ethernet interface module CC Link IE Controller Network module Module on CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H module MELSECNET 10 module OPEN A generic term for the GP OPEN and ZP OPEN Predefined protocol support function A function of GX Works3 This function
155. command for word devices 59H An extension file register cannot be specified Correct the device specification 60H The communication time between the CPU module and the Ethernet Increase the response monitoring timer value equipped module exceeded the response monitoring timer value 186 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 8 End Codes Returned to an External Device During Data Communications 63H In communications using a fixed buffer the remote password of the port After unlocking the remote password using the SLMP perform for the destination Ethernet module is in the lock status communications using a fixed buffer Exclude ports used for communications using a fixed buffer from the targets of the remote password check 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 87 3 8 End Codes Returned to an External Device During Data Communications APPENDICES Appendix 1 Module Label The I O signals and buffer memory of the Ethernet equipped module can be set using module label Structure of the module label The module label name is defined with the following structure Instance name _ Module number Port number Label name Instance name Module number Label name Instance name Module number Port number Label name D Instance name Module number Label name D EN71 1 stPortt wnVal Address D O name The following are the instance names of the RJ71EN71 corresponding to each network type
156. correctly Correct the IP addresses Parameter information port 1 and port 2 IP addresses of the Ethernet Set different IP addresses for port 1 and port 2 Parameter type equipped module are duplicated I O No Parameter No Network No Station No 1155H specified connection was already closed in TCP IP Perform the open processing for the specified communications connection Open processing is not performed Check if the open processing has been performed in the external device 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 169 1157H specified connection was already closed in UDP IP communications Open processing is not performed Perform the open processing for the specified connection Check if the open processing has been performed in the external device 1165H Data was not sent correctly with UDP IP Check the settings for connection with the external device Check the operation of the external device or switching hub Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the connection cable is disconnected Check that there is no connection failure with the switching hub Execute the PING test and communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action 1166H Data was not sent correctly with TCP IP Check the setti
157. cture of Predefined Protocol Send only The send packet is sent once Receive only If there is a packet that matches within the maximum of 16 registered receive packets the packet is received Send amp receive After sending the send packets if there are packets that match the up to 16 registered receive packets the packets are received 1 FUNCTIONS 3 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 5 Packet elements The packet is created with a combination of packet elements Up to 32 elements can be set in one packet One packet can have a maximum data length of 2046 This section describes the details of the packet elements For examples of the packet element data refer to the following lt Page 230 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Element Name Code Type asa String Setting Value 0 byte Setting Range 1 to 50 or Use when there are specific codes and character strings such as commands in the packet When sending The specified code and character string are sent When receiving The received data is verified Multiple static data elements can be placed anywhere in the data part The following table lists the items Element Name Set the element name Code Type Select a data type of the setting value ASCII string ASCII control code HEX Setting Value Set data within 1 to 50 bytes Setting example Code type and setting range a
158. d Remote password mismatch count 20680 50C8H MELSOFT application transmission port UDP MELSOFT application transmission port UDP Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal end Remote password mismatch count 20685 50CDH MELSOFT application transmission port TCP MELSOFT application transmission port TCP Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal end Remote password mismatch count 20690 50D2H FTP transmission port FTP transmission port Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal end Remote password mismatch count 202 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Buffer memory addresses not supported by the RJ71EN71 The following table lists the buffer memory addresses of the MELSEC Q series Ethernet interface modules that are not supported by the RJ71EN71 228 E4H Error log area Error log write pointer 229 to 372 to 174H Error log block area 944 to 949 to 3B5H FTP setting area FTP login name 950 to 953 3B6H to 3B9H Password 20488 5008H System port information System port use prohibited System port use prohibited designation area designation area 20592 5070H Monitoring area Remote password function Remote password mismatch notification accumulated monitoring area count designation user connection 20593 5071H Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation system connection 20594 5072H Connec
159. d Time Hour Minute Day of Week Set an execution time value within the following range in Clock Time Hour Minute Hour 0 to 23 Default 12 Minute 0 to 59 Default 0 To specify the day of the week when time setting is executed set Not Set in the day when time setting is not executed under Day of Week Time setting is set to be executed every day all the days are set to Set by default When specifying the day of the week set at least one day of the week to Set An error occurs when all the days are set to Not Set 134 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings Timer Settings for Data Communication Set the timer used for the following communications Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT Communications using SLMP Communications using the predefined protocol Socket communications Communications using a fixed buffer Communication using the random access buffer File transfer function FTP server When changing the timer settings for data communication refer to the precautions before setting 136 Precautions for settings Item Description Setting range Change Set Timer Values Select whether to change timer values from the default The timer operates with its default value when No is selected No Yes Default No TCP Resend Timer Set the waiting time to resend ACK if it is not returned when a connection is open
160. d buffer data Stores the fixed buffer data APPENDICES APPENDIX 214 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory thernet 2 common information Open completion signal Un G1900000 to Un G1900007 The open status of each connection is stored 0 Closed or not open 1 Open completed Un G1900000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Un G1900007 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 The numbers in the table indicate connection numbers Open request signal Un G1900008 to 181900015 The open processing status of each connection is stored 0 No open request 1 Requesting open Un G1900008 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Un G1900015 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 The numbers in the table indicate connection numbers llSocket fixed buffer reception status signal Un G1900016 to Un G1900023 The reception status of each connection is stored 0 Data not received 1 Data reception completed Un G1900016 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Un G1900023 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 The numbers in the table indicate connection numbers initial status Un G1900024 Un G1900024 Stores the status of the RJ71EN71 when using the Ethernet function in
161. d it is automatically set to half duplex mode resulting in unstable communication Set the lower communication speed when communication fails due to noise or other causes 132 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings FTP Server Settings Set the file transfer function FTP server FTP Server Select whether to use the file transfer function FTP server of the Not Use Ethernet equipped module Use Default Not Use Login Name Set the login name to be used for file transfer request login from the 12 characters maximum one byte external device alphanumeric character Default RJ71EN71 RJ71EN71 CPU module RCPU Detail Setting Password Setting Set the password to be used for file transfer request login from the external device 27 Page 133 Password Setting FTP Timer Settings Set the following timers used for the file transfer function FTP server 133 FTP Timer Settings Command Input Monitoring Timer Response Monitoring Timer Allow Online Change Select whether to enable data writing from the external device using Disable the file transfer function FTP server while the CPU module is in RUN Enable state Default Disable Current Password Enter the current password for login to the Ethernet equipped module Default password initial setting is the following RJ71EN71 RJ71EN71 CPU module RCPU Although the default pa
162. d while waiting for a response Fixed buffer send failed Message send of the fixed buffer has failed Random access communication error The parameter start address and data word of the data received by the random access communication is faulty 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 184 3 7 Event List 10200 Security Remote password lock The lock processing of the remote password was performed 10201 Remote password unlock successful The unlock processing of the remote password was succeeded 10202 Remote password unlock failed The unlock processing of the remote password has failed 10300 Access from IP restricted with IP filter setting Accessed from IP address restricted with the IP filter setting 10500 Forced invalidation setting Forced invalidation setting was executed 10501 Forced invalidation cancel Forced invalidation setting was canceled 24E00 Operation ERR LED off execution The ERR LED has turned off using the output signal Y17 of the module 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 7 Event List 185 3 8 End Codes Returned to an External Device During Data Communications The following table lists the error codes stored in the end code appended to a response during data communications End Error details and causes Action code 00H Normal completion When each communication is normally completed the error code 00H is stored 02H The device range destination of devi
163. dd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the end device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of OOH When Lower Bytes Only is selected a size double the data length is occupied Word Specified device 0 Data storage area Data storage area Receive packet Data storage area n For send packet Send data is stored by the program For receive packet Receive data is stored by the Ethernet equipped module 1 FUNCTIONS 39 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol When Fixed Length Variable Length is Variable Length The area after the device number specified on the Element Setting window 1 becomes the data storage area The occupied data storage area differs according to the Unit of Stored Data When Lower Byte Upper Byte is selected the same size as the data length one word length for the data length storage area are occupied However when the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the end device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of 00H When Lower Bytes Only is selected a size double the data length one word for data length storage area is occupied Word Specified device 0 Data length stor
164. ddress 2000028 to 1E849CH to 2000030 1E849EH 31 1FH 1E849FH Own node network number 2000031 32 20H 1E84A0H Station number 2000032 33 21H 1E84A1H Transient transmission group number 2000033 34 22H 1E84A2H Send frame setting 2000034 35 23H 1E84A3H Jumbo frame setting 2000035 36 24H 1E84A4H Communication speed setting 2000036 37 25H 1E84A5H Auto open UDP port number 2000037 38 26H 1E84A6H MELSOFT connection TCP port number 2000038 APPENDICES APPENDIX 191 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 39 27H 1E84A7H Own node setting status MELSOFT connection UDP port number 2000039 storage area 40 28H 1E84A8H MELSOFT direct connection port number 2000040 41 to 99 29H to 63H System area 2000041 to 1E84A9H to 2000099 1E84E3H 100 to 163 64H to A3H Connection status Connection No 1 latest error code to Connection No 64 latest error code 2000100 to 1E84E4H to storage area 2000163 1E8523H 164 to 999 A4H to 3E7H System area 2000164 to 1E8524H to 2000999 1E8867H 1000 3E8H System port latest error FTP server latest error code 2001000 1E8868H code storage area 1001 3E9H MELSOFT direct connection latest error code 2001001 1E8869H 1002 to 4999 3EAH to 1387H System area 2001002 to 1E886AH to 2004999 1E9807H 5000 to 5001 1388H to 1389H Status for
165. de at the start of operation according to the system specifications After the specified clear is executed the CPU module will RUN according to the device s default settings status Function Displays the CPU module operation information This command is used to check the CPU module s operation information when transferring files to the CPU module Specification format quote status One of the following is displayed as the execution results when the process ends normally When CPU module is in RUN state RUN When CPU module is in STOP state STOP When CPU module is in PAUSE state PAUSE stop Function Set the CPU module to the STOP state remote STOP Specification format quote stop The following message appears as the execution results when the process ends normally 200 Command successful Caution Write to the program memory after setting the CPU module to the STOP state with this command pm write Function Transfers the files written in the program cache memory to the program memory so that the files are held even at power off Specification format quote pm write The following message appears as the execution results when the process ends normally 200 Command successful Caution MELSEC iQ R series CPU module automatically transfers the files to program memory after writing them in the program cache memory Therefore the files are held at power off without
166. differs from that of the Ethernet equipped module The same IP address has been set to multiple Ethernet equipped modules The same network number or station number has been set to multiple Ethernet equipped modules Correct the module parameters No error Error exists Error exists The Ethernet line is heavily loaded The routing settings are not configured Perform the test again when the Ethernet line is not heavily loaded Correct the setting value of the routing settings Error code No error The MELSOFT Transmission Port UDP IP forthe Disable the remote password setting and write the Ethernet equipped module is locked with the remote parameters to the CPU module password The target module does not support the Check the module name and function version communication status test No error Error exists The Ethernet line is heavily loaded Perform the test again when the Ethernet line is not heavily loaded lPrecautions The communication status test cannot be executed when MELSOFT Transmission Port UDP IP for the target Ethernet equipped module is locked with the remote password When executing the communication status test set Gateway Other Than Default Gateway under Gateway Parameter Settings in Application Settings to Not Use 160 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 3 Checking the Network Status 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom This section describes troubleshooting m
167. e reset by the system 1 Reinitialization process request set by the user 40 28H Communication address Own station port No Communication address Own station port No setting area Initial value OH setting area Initial value OH 41 to 42 29H to 2AH SonnsetianiNa 1 Destination IP address Connection Nod Destination IP address Initial value OH Initial value OH 43 2BH Destination Port No Destination Port No Initial value OH Initial value OH 44 to 46 2CH to 2EH Destination MAC address System area Initial value FFFFFFFFFFFFH 47 to 95 2FH to 5FH Communication address setting area Connection No 2 to 8 Communication address setting area Connection No 2 to 8 Same as connection No 1 Same as connection No 1 106 to 107 6AH to 6BH Own station IP address Own station IP address Initial value OH Initial value COA80328H 108 to 110 6CH to 6EH Own station MAC address Own station MAC address Initial value OH Initial value MAC address of the RJ71EN71 200 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 116 74H Auto open UDP port number Auto open UDP port number Initial value OH Initial value 1388H 200 C8H LED status LED status INIT LED 60 P ERR LED b0 0 Off 0 Off 1 On initial processing completed 1 On or flashing OPEN LED b1 0 Off 1 On connection open processing completed ERR LED b3 0 Off 1 On setting error COM ERR LED b4 0 Off 1 On communication error 201 C9H Hu
168. e correct Execute the cpuchg command and change the access destination CPU module If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure 25 Page 153 Module communication test 1 1 The module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure QA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup ting function SNTP client cannot be performed normally When the time setting function SNTP client cannot be performed normally check the following items and take action Is the time setting function SNTP client is enabled for the Ethernet equipped module Set Time Setting SNTP Client under Time Setting of Application Settings to Use Page 134 Time Setting Is SNTP Server IP Address set correctly Change the SNTP Server IP Address under Time Setting in Application Settings to the correct IP address 2 5 Page 134 Time Setting If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure 257 Page 153 Module communication test 1 1 The module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup cannot be allowed permitted correctly by the IP
169. e data sent with broadcast send is received Setting procedure Set External Device Configuration under Basic Settings 5 Page 127 External Device Configuration 1 Select UDP Connection Module in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area 2 Set Communication Method for the external device to Broadcast Send or Broadcast Receive 3 Setthe other parameters required for communication in the connection Point Access via a router is not permitted when using broadcast send Precautions for broadcast communication Decide the dedicated port number for broadcast communication in the system and use that number Access via a router is not permitted when using broadcast send The external device connected on the same Ethernet must carry out a read discard processing if the message received with broadcast receiving is not required Data Format This section describes the data format used during communications using a fixed buffer The communication data is configured of the header and application data Header The header is for TCP IP or UDP IP The RJ71EN71 automatically adds and deletes the header so it does not need to be set The contents of the header are shown below e TCP IP Ethernet 14 bytes IP 20 bytes TCP 20 bytes UDP IP Ethernet 14 bytes IP 20 bytes UDP 8 bytes Application data If the communication procedure is Fix
170. e element name Data Length 0 Number of characters Set when the number of characters that are not verified differs variable between each communication session 1 to 2046 number of Set the number of characters that are not verified character specification Point When Data Length is set to 0 an error will occur if the following layout is used element other than static data is placed behind a non verified reception element when non verified reception is out of the length calculating range or when there is no length element except for when non verified reception is placed at the end of the packet elements Multiple non verified reception elements are placed in the length calculating range while a length element is not placed Anon verified reception element is placed before a length element in the length calculating range Execution conditions of predefined protocol communications The predefined protocol communications can be executed when Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 is on This section describes the operation of Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 When the system is powered on or reset If protocol setting data is written in the Ethernet equipped module checks the protocol setting data when the system is powered on or reset If the protocol setting data is normal the Ethernet equipped module turns on Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 and enables execution of th
171. e following section lists the precautions for using the IP address Power off and reset operation Do not turn the CPU module power off or execute reset when writing to or clearing the IP address storage area system memory The values may not be applied onto the IP address storage area system memory Power off or reset the CPU module after checking the falling edge of SM1520 IP address storage area write request or SM1522 IP address storage area clear request Parameter IP address For the CPU module IP address the value in the IP address storage area system memory has precedence over the parameter value When using the IP address specified with the parameters clear the IP address storage area system memory 4 22 1 FUNCTIONS 1 11 IP Address Change Function Write processing and clear processing execution timing It may not be possible to execute the write or clear processing to the IP address storage area system memory if an operation that turns off and on or on and off SM1520 IP address storage area write request or SM1522 IP address storage area clear request in a short time is executed If SM1520 IP address storage area write request is turned off and on again while writing to the IP address storage area system memory the write processing that was executed first will complete normally and the following write operation will be ignored This also applies to the clear operation If SM1522 IP add
172. e performed on the same line The Maximum Segment Size is 1460 bytes on the same line without a router and the number of TCP segment transmissions is as follows n 1 when the size of the message sent by the Ethernet equipped module is 1460 bytes or less Maximum Segment size 2 when the size of the message sent by the Ethernet equipped module is greater than 1460 bytes Ex The number of TCP segment transmission when communications are performed on a different line The Maximum Segment Size is at least 536 bytes on another line via a dialup router or other communication device and the number of TCP segment transmissions is as follows n 1 when the size of the message sent by the Ethernet equipped module is 536 bytes or less n 2when the size of the message sent by the Ethernet equipped module is greater than 536 bytes and no more than 1072 bytes when the size of the message sent by the Ethernet equipped module is greater than 1072 bytes and no more than 1608 bytes 136 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings Number of retries When a communication failure occurs due to a problem such as noise change the value so that the number of retries may increase The number of retries is obtained using the following formula When using the default values 3 30 10 Number of retries TCP ULP timer value TCP resend timer value Ex When the number of retries is three and data sending fails a data sending
173. e protocol Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 is used as the interlock signal for executing the protocol If the protocol setting data is abnormal Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 stays off and the details of the error are stored in Predefined protocol setting data check area Un G1901020 to Un G1901047 If protocol setting data is not written in the protocol setting data is not checked and Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 remains off Whether the protocol setting data is registered or not can be checked with Number of registered predefined protocols Un G1901024 and Predefined protocol registration Un G1091032 to UnG1901047 1 FUNCTIONS 41 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol When protocol setting data is normal 42 Power on reset Normal result z 1 i 1 Checking the protocol setting data Ethernet equipped module 1 1 Bit 0 turns on when the check result is normal Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 Predefined protocol setting data check area Un G1901020 to Un G1901047 The number of registered protocols and information about whether protocols have been registered are stored When protocol setting data is abnormal Power on reset Abnormal result Checking the protocol setting data Ethernet equipped module Bit 0 remains off
174. e protocol for the external device refer to the manual for the device used Is the communication method of the connection used for communication with Correct the communication method setting if an item other than Predefined the external device is set to an item other than Predefined Protocol in the Protocol is set 25 Page 127 External Device Configuration External Device Configuration window of Basic Settings Is Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 on If Predefined protocol ready Un G1901002 0 is off write the protocol setting data to the module If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure Page 153 Module communication test 1 The buffer memory address is for when the network type of the RJ71EN 71 is set to Ethernet and the P1 connector is used When using the P2 connector or the CPU module or setting the network type to Q Compatible Ethernet refer to the following C 191 Buffer Memory 2 If the connection of only the external device is closed due to cable disconnection personal computer restart or other reasons reopen the connection using the same port used before the error occurred The E71 does not close a connection if it receives an Active open request again from the external device with a different IP address or a port number 3 module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform
175. e selected module Communication Speed Displays the communication mode set for the selected module IP address 1st octet Displays the IP address set for the selected module IP address 2nd octet IP address 3rd octet IP address 4th octet MAC address 1st octet Displays the MAC address of the selected module MAC address 2nd octet MAC address 3rd octet MAC address 4th octet MAC address 5th octet MAC address 6th octet Individual information P2 Ethernet Same as the P1 connector 1 This item is displayed when the network type is set to Ethernet For when the network type is set to CC Link IE Control refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Controller Network User s Manual Application For when the network type is set to CC Link IE Field refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application 152 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 2 Checking the Module Status cation test The module communication test checks the hardware of the RJ71EN71 When the communication using the RJ71EN71 is unstable whether an hardware failure occurs or not can be checked The following list the tests performed Internal self loopback test Checks whether the communication function of the module can be performed normally External self loopback test Checks whether the communication can be performed normally with the cable connected between
176. e subcommand after the quote command Eed means to input CR Enter or the Return key Executing the STOP command Input the following at the command prompt quote stop The following table lists the subcommands can be used Executable Not executable 1 change Shows or changes the CPU module file attributes O O x cpuchg 2 Specifies the access destination CPU module when usinga O O O x multi CPU system configuration passwd rd Sets shows or clears the file password read password O O passwd wr Sets shows or clears the file password write password Oo x password lock Changes the remote password from the unlock state to the O O O O x 4 lock state password unlock Changes the remote password from the lock state to the O O O O unlock state status Displays the CPU module operation information O O O O x run Sets the CPU module to the RUN state O O O x stop Sets the CPU module to the STOP state O O O O x pm write Writes the program memory O x x O x 1 If executed the process completes abnormally 2 This subcommand cannot be used when the connection destination is a CPU module 3 subcommand is invalid when the RUN STOP RESET switch of the CPU module is set to STOP 4 Even if the subcommand is executed the remote password remains locked with no error occurred command This section describes the method of spec
177. e upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the end device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of OOH Ex When sending data whose length is an odd number External device Send dat Word Specified device No byte swap diis Data length storage area 0 0005H pe 05H 04H 03H 02H 01H Data storage area 1 0201H 1 Sending Data are not sent 2 0403H 3 0605 Dose 06H 04H 01H 02H Byte swap APPENDICES APPENDIX 237 Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Ex When receiving data whose length is an odd number Word Specified device No byte swap Data length storage area 0 0005H Data storage area 1 0201H 2 0403H 3 0005 4 Send data Receiving 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H Word Specified device Byte swap Data length storage area 0 0005H Data storage area 1 0102H 2 0304H 3 0500H External device When unit of stored data is Lower Byte Only Asize double the data length is occupied For the upper data the Ethernet equipped module ignores the data at sending and adds OOH to the data at receiving Non verified reception The usage examples for a non verified reception element is shown below ex Example of a packet format of the external device Neces
178. earch dialog and perform the search again Precautions When the CPU module and engineering tool are connected with an Ethernet cable if remote STOP or remote PAUSE has been executed from the engineering tool to another station s CPU module perform the following step before turning the power off or resetting Remote RUN Remote RESET 20 1 FUNCTIONS 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product and GOT Direct connection The Ethernet equipped module and engineering tool can be directly connected with one Ethernet cable without using a hub When directly connected communication is possible without specifying the connection destination or without setting the IP address or host name Communicate using broadcast communications Point To prohibit direct connection with the Ethernet set Disable for Disable Direct Connection with MELSOFT in Security under the Application Settings direct connection is not possible when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet Set with Specify Connection Destination 72 Online gt Specify Connection Destination 2 Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times CCIECont Ethernet CC4ink C24 NET 10 H H H m m m CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting 108 Not Specified
179. ecution time Un G11001 to UnG 11007 Required response time Un G11008 Precautions lTime to be set The time to be set in the CPU module is the time which is obtained by adjusting the time information UTC acquired from the SNTP server time information server based on the time zone set in Operation Related Setting under CPU Parameters of the CPU parameters Communication timeout If a response is not received from the SNTP server time information sever 20 seconds after the time setting is executed the communication times out An error does not occur when the communication times out Instead the timeout occurrence appears in the event history lelDelay by communication time The time set in the CPU module may be delayed by the time required to communicate with the SNTP server s personal computer To reduce this delay specify an SNTP server personal computer on the network that is as close to the Ethernet equipped module as possible When using multi CPU system configuration Execute the time setting only for the CPU No 1 Even if the time is set for a CPU module other than the CPU No 1 the clock data for the CPU No 1 is set automatically llSetting the execution time The execution time can be set in the range of 1980 to 2079 1 1 2 1 FUNCTIONS 1 9 Time Setting Function SNTP Client 1 10 Security Function Security suitable for the network environment can be structured by restricting access by each communica
180. ed Buffer No Procedure the application data expresses the following data code with binary codes Data is exchanged with binary codes regardless of the communication data code setting Text command Maximum of 10238 bytes 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Point With nonprocedural the subheader and data length added for procedural are not used so the data is all handled as valid text The RJ71EN71 turns on the fixed buffer reception status signal after storing the size of the received message packet in the receive data length storage area Providing a check procedure including the data length data type code and so on in the message s application data is recommended so that the application data s byte size and data type can be seen on the receiving side The following figure shows the configuration of the application data when the communication procedure is set to Fixed Buffer Procedure Exist Format When exchanging data with binary codes Application data area command message A Maximum of 2 bytes 2 bytes 5113 words f 2 Y as yY A Data length Text Communication Subheader setting command request source H L H Communication request destination Subheader End code 2 A S 1 byte 1 byte y Application data area Response When exchanging data with ASCII codes Applicati
181. ed on the open processing of connection No 1 is performed When the open processing is completed successfully bOpen 3 is turned 279 When bStartSend M5 is turned on the send data is stored and sent to the receiving side When the data send is completed successfully bSend_OK M7 is turned on 396 When bStartClose M13 is turned on the close processing of connection No 1 is performed When the close processing is completed successfully bClose OK M15 is turned on 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Receiving side Module label RCPU stSM bAlways_ON Always on 5 400 EN71 EE 1 bnCompletion ConnectionOpen 1 Open completion signal connection No 1 U0 G1900000 0 EN71_EE_1 bnCompletion_ReceiveSocket_FixedBuffer 1 Socket fixed buffer reception status signal U0 G1900016 0 connection No 1 EN71 EE 1 uCompletion Ethernetlnitialized O Initial status U0 G1900024 0 Label to be defined Define global labels as shown below Label Name Data Type Class Assign Device Label bRunRefresh bStartecv B bRecv OK _ Bit m GLOBAL bRevNG t CL GLOBAL M2 edpsgeqersegpEu AR GLOBAL 00 uRecvEmD Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit GLoBAL 020 uRecvData Unsigned Bit String 16 01 0 5119 VAR GLOBAL 02000 RJ71EN71 EE Refresh Data 0081 MFRJ71EN71 EE
182. ed or data is sent in TCP IP This timer is also used for Time to Live for the ARP function ARP is resent at intervals of 50ms if no response to an ARP request is returned This timer is also used as the minimum set time for arrival monitoring time for data link instructions Unit s 1 to 16383 Unit ms 100 to 16383000 Default 10s Destination Alive Check Start Interval Timer Set the time interval between the reception of the last message from the external device and the start of alive check Unit s 1 to 16383 Unit ms 100 to 16383000 Default 600s Destination Alive Check Interval Timer Set the time interval for performing alive check again when no response is returned from the external device of alive check target Unit s 1 to 16383 Unit ms 100 to 16383000 Default 10s Destination Alive Check Resend Count Set the number of times to perform alive check when no response is 1 to 99999 returned from the external device of alive check target Default 3 Detail Setting Response Monitoring Timer Set the following time The time to wait for a response after sending command in communications with a fixed buffer procedure exists The time interval between the first message and last message when receiving the divided messages Unit s 1 to 16383 Unit ms 100 to 16383000 Default 30s TCP ULP Timer Set the time to live of the send packet in TCP IP communications
183. ed simultaneously and the system configuration The value calculated with the following formula is a guide for the processing time when communicating with only one connection f fixed buffer communications between the RJ71EN71s exists Tfs St Ke Kdf x Df Sr Tfs Time from start to end of send unit ms St Sending station scan time Kdf Constant refer to following table Df Number of send data words Sr Receiving station scan time When communicating with binary code data 6 0 0030 3 0 0020 When communicating with ASCII code data 6 0 0100 4 0 0015 procedure Tfs St Ke Kdf x Df Tfs Time from start to end of send unit ms St Sending station scan time Ke Kdf Constant refer to following table Df Number of send data bytes When communicating with binary code data 4 0 0010 3 0 0007 Im pi ng time of communications using the random access buffer Trs Df external device ACK processing time added only during TCP IP communications Trs Time from reception of personal computer request data to complete of process by RJ71EN71 unit ms Kr Kdr Constant refer to following table Df Number of request data words External device ACK process time Time until external device returns ACK upon completion of random access buffer read write During read When communicating wi
184. edefined protocols 1901025 to 1D01E1H to System area 1901031 1D01E7H 1901032 to 1D01E8H to Predefined protocol registration 1901047 1D01F7H 1901048 to 1D01F8H to System area 1901999 1DO5AFH 1902000 to 1 05 to Send receive area for Send receive area for predefined protocol support function 1904047 1DODAFH predefined protocol support function 1904048 to 1DODBOH to System area 1999999 1E847FH Do not write any data to System area Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system If the value an area of one word in size becomes equal to or higher than 65536 the count stops at 65535 FFFFH APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory The following table lists the buffer memory addresses related to the Ethernet function of the CPU module 50 to 51 32H to 33H Own node setting status Own node IP address 60 to 61 3CH to 3DH storage area Subnet mask 64 to 65 40H to 41H Default gateway IP address 74 to 76 4AH to 4CH Own node MAC address 77 4DH Own node network number 78 4EH Station number 79 4FH Transient transmission group number 80 50H Send frame setting 82 52H Communication speed setting 83 53H Auto open UDP port number 84 54H MELSOFT connection TCP port number 85 55
185. eed is set to Jumbo Frame and the Ethernet equipped module communicates at a speed less than 1Gbps the module sends data in the standard frame size When the item other than Automatic Negotiation or 1Gbps Full Duplex is set in Communication Speed of Application Settings Jumbo Frame cannot be set to other than Disable MTU 1500 byte 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 1 31 2 3 Application Settings Communication Speed Select the communication speed and communication mode from the following Default Automatic Negotiation When Automatic Negotiation is selected communication speed will be automatically set to be the same as that of another device connected to the network Automatic Negotiation 1Gbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 10Mbps Full Duplex 1 This setting is not available when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Compatible Ethernet Select Automatic Negotiation to use 1Gbps full duplex Point When the auto negotiation function is used there is a time lag before starting communication because it requires the time to determine the communication speed and communication mode by FLP burst It is recommended to set the auto negotiation also in the communication partner when using the auto negotiation function If auto negotiation is not set in ether of the Ethernet equipped module or partner external device communication mode cannot be identified an
186. emory 20619 508BH 20621 508DH 20622 508EH 20623 508FH 20624 5090H 20626 5092H 20627 5093H 20628 5094H 20629 5095H 20631 5097H 20632 5098H 20633 5099H 20634 509AH 20636 509CH 20637 509DH 20638 509EH 20639 509FH 20641 50A1H 20642 50A2H 20643 50A3H 20644 50A4H 20646 50A6H 20647 50A7H 20648 50A8H Monitoring area Remote password function monitoring area Connection No 6 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 7 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 8 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 9 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 10 Accumulated count of
187. en data length specified immediately after subheader text data volume The RJ71EN71 waits to receive the insufficient remaining data If the remaining data is received within the response monitor timer value the RJ71EN71 executes a processing corresponding to the subheader code If the remaining data is not received within the response monitor timer value the RJ71EN71 executes the following processing The ABORT RST instruction is sent to the external device and the line is closed The error code is stored in Connection status storage area Un G100 to Un G163 Fixed Buffer No Procedure During nonprocedural there is no message data length so the received data is stored as is into the receive buffer area Providing a check procedure including the data length data type code and so on in the message s application data is recommended so that the application data s byte size and data type can be seen on the receiving side 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Example of communications using a fixed buffer This section describes the socket communications examples using Active open of TCP IP communications System configuration Sending side Receiving side 192 0 1 100 192 0 1 101 GX Works3 Ethernet Parameter settings Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module and set the parameters Sending side 1 Set the CPU module in the fol
188. er Function FTP server Files that can be transferred with FTP The files that can be transferred read write deleted with the file transfer function FTP server are shown below Transfer possible A Transfer possible only when CPU module is in STOP state Transfer not possible Program x x x x x x x x x A A FB file x x x x x x x x x A PFB CPU parameter x x x x x x A O A A A PRM System parameter x x x x x x A Module parameter x x x x x x O A A O A Module extension x x x x x A O A A O A PRM PPR parameter Memory card x x x x x x x x x A PRM parameter Device comment x x x x O A O O A DCM Device default x x x x x x x x x x x x DID value Global label setting x x x x x x x x x x x FG file Label default value x x x x x x x x x x x Restoration x x x x x x information File register x x x A x x x o O A QDR Event history x x x x x x x x x x x x LOG Device data x x x x x x x x x x x x QST storage file General purpose x x x x x x Arbitrary data Logging setting file x x x x x x x x x LCS Common setting file Logging setting file x x x x x x O O O LIS Individual setting file Remote password x x x x x x x x x x x x 1 written cannot be run as a
189. er error which affect module operation The module stops operating Minor An error such as communication failure The module continues operating Detailed Information Displays detailed information about each error maximum of 3 pieces Cause Displays the detailed error causes Corrective Action Displays the actions to eliminate the error causes 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 1 3 2 Checking the Module Status 5 Module Name Production information prea ee Monitoring Execute LED information RUN P1IEF P2 IEF ERR MST PRM P1 D LINK P1 PERR P2 D LINK P2 P ERR Individual information P1 Ethemet NetworkNo Station Number Ethemet V2 0 frame Disable MTU 1500 byte IP address 1st octet 192 IP address 2nd octet 0 IP address 3rd octet 1 IP address 4th octet 100 address 1st octet E Mac address 2nd octet LED information Displays the LED status of the Ethernet equipped module Individual information P1 Network Number Displays the network number set for the selected module Ethernet Station No Displays the station number set for the selected module Transient Transmission Group No Displays the transient transmission group number set for the selected module Send Frame Displays the send frame setting set for the selected module Jumbo Frame Displays the jumbo frame setting set for th
190. eries follow the transportation regulations For details on the regulated models refer to the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual The halogens such as fluorine chlorine bromine and iodine which are contained in fumigant used for disinfection and pest control of wood packaging materials may cause failure of the product Prevent the entry of fumigant residues into the product or consider other methods such as heat treatment instead of fumigation The disinfection and pest control measures must be applied to unprocessed raw wood CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING
191. ermined for the CPU module is assigned for the extension 257 Page 101 Files that can be transferred with FTP When using a FTP command that can be used for multiple files specify the file name and extension with the wild card or Depending on the FTP client there may be additional restrictions to the characters that can be used for the file name All files with the arbitrary character string including none are targeted from the position specified with 2 All files with the arbitrary character string excluding none are targeted from the position specified with can be used multiple times Details of FTP command This section describes the FTP commands on the FTP client side supported by the Ethernet equipped module and the methods of using those commands Point Note that depending on the client side FTP application some of the FTP commands not operate as described in this manual Refer to the manual for the FTP client and check the functions operation methods and so on The section enclosed in square brackets in the specification format can be omitted server support command 104 Command name Description binary Function Notifies the FTP server that the file will be transferred without conversion The return code and kanji codes are also not converted These settings are automat
192. ernal device to the Review the subheader specified in the application data section RJ71EN71 is incorrect The exchanged data may be split and exchanged due to buffer limitations to the own station or external station The data that is split and received is restored reassembled by the RH71EN71 and exchanged The received data is restored reassembled based on the data length in the exchanged data The RJ71EN71 processing that takes place when the data the exchange data is incorrect is shown below Fixed Buffer Procedure Exist Random Access Buffer When data length specified immediately after subheader text data volume The data immediately after the text corresponding to the data length specified immediately after the subheader is handled as the second message The start of each statement becomes the subheader so the RJ71EN71 executes a processing corresponding to the subheader code If the subheader is not a code supported by the RJ71EN71 an abnormal completion response is sent to the external device Data sent from the external device Data processed by the RJ71EN71 1st data 2nd data 4 gt gt Subheader Subheader This section is processed as a subheader In the above case the code processed as the subheader with the uppermost bit set as 1 is returned as the response For example if the command s subheader section is 65H the response s subheader is E5H Wh
193. error occurs again even after taking the above please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The transient data is incorrect Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation f the error occurs again even after taking the above please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C1C2H When the dedicated instruction was executed data was Check the network status and take corrective action received twice using the Ethernet diagnostics of the engineering tool Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are set correctly and take action C1C4H_ The arrival check of the link dedicated instruction was Execute link dedicated instruction again after changing completed with an error the execution type in the control data to No arrival confirmation For the REQ instruction execute again after correcting request type C1C5H A dedicated instruction which the target station does not Change the target station at the station that executed support was executed the SEND instruction If the error occurs again even after taking the above please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C1C6H The execution or error completion type of the link Execute again after correcting the execution abnormal dedicated instruction is incorrect end type in
194. ess buffer Writing __ Reading External Writing External device andom Reading External device Reading evice The CPU module does not have a random access buffer Setting procedure Set External Device Configuration under Basic Settings L Page 127 External Device Configuration 1 Selectthe external device to be connected in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area External device name Description UDP Connection Module Select to communicate with the external device using UDP IP Active Connection Module Select to perform the open processing to the external device from the Ethernet equipped module Active open and communicate using TCP IP Unpassive Connection Module Select to receive the open processing from a unspecified external device Unpassive open and communicate using TCP IP Fullpassive Connection Module Select to receive the open processing from the specified external device Fullpassive open and communicate using TCP IP 2 Set Communication Method for external device to Random Access Buffer 3 Setthe IP address of the external device 4 Setthe other parameters required for communication in the connection 25 Page 127 External Device Configuration 1 FUNCTIONS 8 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer 5 86 Communication structure This section describes the mechanism of comm
195. est exceeded the upper limit of Pause the transient transmission temporarily and retry simultaneously processable requests the operation Lower the transient transmission usage frequency and then perform again C842H The routing setting is not set to reach to the destination Execute the link dedicated instruction again after network number correcting the target network number and station number When the dynamic routing is used check that communication path to the destination network number is set When the dynamic routing is not used or the module of the series other than MELSEC iQ R is included retry the operation after correcting the routing setting C843H Link dedicated instruction that cannot be executed on the Check the network type of the Ethernet equipped network type were executed module C844H Incorrect frame is received Correct the request data at the transient request source Unsupported pre conversion protocol Unsupported frame type Application header variable part Application header HDS Application header RTP Read command not requiring response and retry the operation 182 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 3 6 List of Parameter Numbers This section lists the parameter numbers displayed in the module diagnostics Basic Own Node Settings Parameter Setting Met
196. ested to start the interrupt program and data is received from the external device Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection No 2 Un G1900016 1 On The interrupt program starts The BUFRCVS instruction is executed and the receive data length and receive data are read from the fixed buffer No 2 Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection No 2 Un G1900016 1 Off Execution of the interrupt program ends and execution of the main program resumes 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Pairing open Pairing open is an opening method that pairs a fixed buffer communication reception connection and send connection and establishes a connection using one port each from the own station and external device When pairing open is specified data can be exchanged with two connections using an open processing for one port TCP IP or UDP IP communications RJ71EN71 Send data Connection No 1 Fixed buffer for receiving External device Receive data Connection No 2 Fixed buffer for sending Setting procedure Set External Device Configuration under Basic Settings 5 Page 127 External Device Configuration Select the external device to be connected in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area Set Communication Measure for the external device Set the Fixed Buffer Send Receive Setting with the extern
197. et equipped module s port number and read the data sent to that port Ethernet equipped module IP address xx xx xx xx Ethernet External device 1 IP address External device 2 IP address zz zz zz zz External device 3 IP address ww ww ww ww 1 Sending UDP data from Ethernet equipped module s port number A to external device 1 s port number L 2 Sending UDP data from external device 1 s port number L to Ethernet equipped module s port number A 3 Sending data with TCP IP connection 4 Sending UDP data from Ethernet equipped module s port number C to external device 3 s port number N 5 Sending DUP data from external device 3 s port number N to Ethernet equipped module s port number C 1 FUNCTIONS 1 4 Socket Communications Communications using TCP IP TCP IP protocol establishes a connection between the external device s port number for reliable data exchange Check the following items before performing socket communications using TCP IP IP addresses and port numbers on external device side IP addresses and port numbers on the Ethernet equipped module side Which side the external device side or Ethernet equipped module side will open a connection Active open or Passive open TCP IP connection operation TCP IP connection includes Active open and Passive open First the side with the TCP IP connection execu
198. ethod by symptom If an error has occurred in the Ethernet equipped module identify the error cause using the engineering tool 25 Page 151 Checking the Module Status Communications cannot be performed with the external device The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the Ethernet equipped module cannot communicate with the external device Check item Action Is the READY LED of the CPU module off If the READY LED of the CPU module is off perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module 1 MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application Is the RUN LED of the RJ71EN71 off If the RUN LED of the RJ71ENT71 is off reset the CPU module If the RUN LED of the RJ71ENT71 is still off even after resetting the CPU module the possible cause is a hardware failure of the RJ71EN71 Replace the RJ71EN71 and restart all the external devices that were performing communications with the own station Is the Ethernet cable securely connected If the Ethernet cable is not securely connected take following actions Securely lock the cable Check the wiring LA MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup Does the external device conform to the Ethernet standard If the device does not conform to the Ethernet standard replace it with one conforming to the standard QA MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup Is the external device powered on
199. evice under Own Node Settings of Basic Settings of the module parameters for Ethernet equipped module ASCII code data which cannot be converted into binary code data has been sent from the external device 55H When Disable All SLMP has been selected in Enable Disable Set the Enable All SLMP to the Enable Disable Online Change Online Change under Own Node Settings of Basic Settings of the under Own Node Settings of Basic Settings of the module module parameters for Ethernet equipped module the external device parameters for Ethernet equipped module and write data However requested a data write while the CPU module was running a parameter program or microcomputer program cannot be written While the CPU module was running the external device requested for while the CPU module is running writing a parameter or program Set the switch on the CPU module to STOP and write the data 56H The external device specified an incorrect device Correct the device specification 57H The number of points for a command specified by an external device Correct the specified points or the start address device number and exceeds the maximum number of processing points number of step number processes that can be executed per communication for each process Check the data length of the command and set the data again Addresses from the start address start device number and start step Register the monitoring data number t
200. execute the operation C084H The communication processing was abnormally ended in Check if the own station relay station external station is the link dedicated instruction communications operating normally Check if there is an error with the cable connection between the own station and the external station Increase the TCP resend timer value of the Ethernet equipped module C085H The target station s channel specified by the link Correct the target station s channel of the SEND dedicated instruction SEND is currently in use instruction COB2H There is no insufficient space in the receive buffer of the Increase the request interval and execute the relay station or external station for the MELSOFT operation connection or link dedicated instructions Receive buffer Do not access through one station using the full error MELSOFT connection link dedicated instruction or SLMP Wait for a response to the previous request before sending the next request Correct the timer setting value for data communication of the Ethernet equipped module COB3H Arequest that cannot be processed was issued from the Correct the request details programmable controller CPU Correct the network number or request destination station number COB6H The channel specified by the link dedicated instruction is Correct the channel to a value within the allowable range out of the range using each link dedicated instruction COBAH
201. f PLC side I F When PLC side I F is Ethernet Module check that Other Station Single Network is selected for Other Station Setting and Access to Ethernet module set on PLC side I F is selected in the Network Communication Route Detailed Setting of Ethernet window of Network Communication Route Does a timeout occur when connecting to the engineering tool Increase the value for Check at Communication Time and Retry Times in the Other Station Detailed Setting window of Other Station Setting and connect again Does the device personal computer to be connected support the direct connection If the device does not support the direct connection connect a hub If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure 257 Page 153 Module communication test 1 1 The module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure QA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup PU module search on the network cannot be performed When the CPU module search on the network cannot be performed check the following items Is Do Not Respond to CPU Module Search under Security of Application Settings is set to Do Not Respond Set Do Not Respond to CPU Module Search under Security of Application Settings to Respond Is the CPU module c
202. f connected modules in External Device Configuration set number 1 modules can be connected When using a UDP IP connection up to the maximum number of connectable modules can be connected When connecting multiple MELSOFT products with TCP IP drag MELSOFT Connection Module from the Module List to List of devices or Device map area in External Device Configuration under Basic Settings Page 127 External Device Configuration 1 FUNCTIONS 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product GOT ESettings on the engineering tool side Set with Specify Connection Destination XZ Online gt Specify Connection Destination Single Network Time Out Sec 30 CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet NET 10 H E m E CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting Not Specified Retry Times 0 EH NH mm CC4ink C24 Ed CCdink C24 Network No 1 Station No 2 This setting is an assignment for Ethernet board Please execute the following settings communication route shown below Communication via GOT Transparent Communication via CC IE Field Ethernet adapter Protocol TCP X Network No Network No of Ethernet module set in parameter Station No Station No that does not overlap on the same loop Network No and station No are not necessary for the Communicati
203. ffective for not only the CPU module on the own station but also the ones on the other stations When Disable All SLMP is selected data writing using SLMP is disabled while the CPU module is in RUN state When Enable All SLMP is selected data writing using SLMP is enabled even when the CPU module is in RUN state To write data to the FTP server when the CPU module is in RUN state set Allow Online Change under FTP Server Settings in Application Settings gt 133 FTP Server Settings 126 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 2 Basic Settings External Device Configuration Set the method and protocol used for communicating with external devices Setting procedure The procedure for setting the external device to be connected is shown below 1 Select the external device to be connected in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area Ethernet Selection Find Module My 4 gt ee UDP Connection Module sfa Active Connection Module 5 Unpassive Connection Module Connection No 1 MELSOFTC onnection M Ir passive Connection Module Device COGNEX Drag and drop Ms eec a Outline IMELSOFT Connection Module Aud If lUse when specify open method by MELSOFT connection 2 Setthe required items The required items vary depending the selected external device 3 Select Close with Discarding the Setting and close
204. ffer send receive setting 128 Number of retries 137 Forced connection invalidation setting area 211 PERPE 14 222 Offline iesus sic ilie ds 148 G a sis Soe aoa ea scales RR ata RR 148 c S Open completion signal 215 Gateway IP 55 139 Open request 5 215 14 Open close 217 Opening 125 H Own node operation status storage 209 Own node setting status storage area 207 Seed ek Phew 70 87 69 14 Passive 222 Initial error 21 5 Password setting TC 1 33 Initial status 21 5 Physical 55 87 242 Predefined protocol library 31 Predefined protocol support function 14 Procedure 60 R Remote password check 116 Remote password lock status storage area 210 Response monitoring timer 134 Routing
205. file name put param PRM 2 param1 PRM Caution If the directory is not specified with the source file path name FTP client side the file in the current connection directory when the FTP server is started and connected is written If the destination file path name FTP server side is not specified the file is transferred to the data memory drive 4 4 pwd Function Displays current directory name of the CPU module Specification format pwd Caution is displayed as the pwd command execution results quit Function Closes the connection with the FTP and quits the FTP Specification format quit Similar command bye quote Function Sends the FTP server s subcommand Ethernet equipped module dedicated subcommand Specification format quote Example quote password lock Caution Only the Ethernet equipped module dedicated subcommand can be specified Refer to the following Page 107 Ethernet equipped module dedicated subcommand rename Function Changes the CPU module file name Specification format rename old file path name new file path name abbreviated ren Example When changing the name of a file stored in the SD memory card rename 2 param PRM 2 param1 PRM Caution The following response code appears when the file is successfully renamed 350 Need more info 250 Rename successful user Function Inputs the user name and password for the connected FTP server Specification format user user name FTP password User name
206. filter When the access cannot be allowed permitted correctly by the IP filter check the following items and take action Is Access from IP address below correctly set in IP Filter Settings under Security of Application Settings Correct the setting of Access from IP address below Are the IP addresses set in IP Address in IP Filter Settings under Security of Application Settings Correct the IP addresses When the IP addresses are specified by range check also the IP addresses to be excluded from the range Is the IP address of the proxy server set to be allowed Set the IP address of the proxy server to be denied password does not work When the remote password does not work check the following items and take action Is the remote password setting of the target connection disabled in the Remote Password Detail Setting window If the remote password is disabled change the setting so that it is enabled Page 114 Remote password 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 3 5 List of Error Codes This section lists the error codes error details and causes and action for the errors occur in the processing for data communication between the Ethernet equipped module and slave stations or caused by processing requests from the CPU module on the own station Error codes are classified into major error moderate error and minor error and can be checked
207. function 1 FUNCTIONS 4 01 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server FTP command The FTP client side commands supported by the Ethernet equipped module are shown below O Executable 1 x Not executable 2 5 Notifies that the file will be transferred without conversion bye Closes and ends the connection with the FTP server O close Closes the connection with the FTP server O delete Deletes the CPU module file Qe x dir Displays the CPU module file information O get Reads a file from the CPU module O O O O x Is Displays the CPU module file name O O O O x mdelete Deletes the CPU module file gs x mdir Stores the CPU module file information in the file O x mget Reads a file from the CPU module O O O O x mls Stores the CPU module file name in the file O O O O x mput Writes the file to the CPU module O O x O x open Connects to the FTP server O O O put Writes the file to the CPU module O O x pwd Displays the current directory of the CPU module O O x quit Closes and ends the connection with the FTP server O O O O O quote Sends the FTP server s subcommand Changes the CPU module file name O O x Inputs the user name and password for the Ethernet equipped O O O O module 1 The command
208. g SLMP cannot be performed Communications using the predefined protocol Page 165 Communications using the predefined protocol cannot be performed Socket communications Communications using a fixed buffer Page 166 Socket communications communications using a fixed buffer cannot be performed Communications using the random access buffer 25 Page 167 Communications using the random access buffer cannot be performed Communications using the link dedicated instruction 257 Page 167 Communications using the link dedicated instruction cannot be performed File transfer function FTP server 168 Access using the file transfer function FTP server cannot be performed A device on Ethernet has a table of IP addresses and their corresponding MAC address called ARP cache When a device on the line is replaced by the one having the same IP address the MAC address in the ARP cache is different from that of the replaced device therefore communications may not be normally performed The ARP cache is updated by resetting the device or after a while The time varies depending on the device If the communication data code setting is different between the Ethernet equipped module and the external device error codes that are not found in the error code list may be returned to the external device When receiving data with different data codes the Ethernet equipped module cannot decode commands normally The Ethernet equipped module
209. g items Is the ERROR LED or ERR LED on or flashing Identify the error cause using the engineering tool Page 151 Checking the Module Status Page 154 Checking the Network Status Are the cables properly connected Correct the cable properly Perform the following tests to check for the status of the cable connection and line PING test 158 PING Test Communication status test Page 159 Communication Status Test Is the program correct Check and correct the send program of the Ethernet equipped module If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure 257 Page 153 Module communication test 1 1 The module communication test cannot be performed for the CPU module Perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module and check for hardware failure QA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup data cannot be received with the SD RD LED off When data cannot be received with the SD RD LED off check the following Is the ERROR LED or ERR LED on or flashing Identify the error cause using the engineering tool 7257 151 Checking the Module Status Page 154 Checking the Network Status Are the cables properly connected Correct the cable properly Perform the following tests to check for the status of the cable connection and line PING test Page 158 PING Test Communication status test 25 Page 159
210. g of the automatic response system is as below When receiving the communication request message command frame the Ethernet equipped module internally stores the send source network number IP address and UDP port number in the request message as the station information The response message response for the communication request message is returned to the destination IP address and UDP port number calculated from the stored network number and station number Therefore by receiving the other station access communication request message first the communication destination stations can be maintained The maximum number of station information that can be set is 120 When more than 120 other station access communication request messages are received the Ethernet equipped module starts deleting from the oldest data to store the station information in the newly received message communication request message However it is ignored if the station information is the same as the station information already stored Information from the same station is not stored twice 142 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings IP Address Calculation System This system obtains the IP address of the destination station by calculating the network number and station number with the formula described below The UDP port number predefined for the Ethernet equipped module is used as the UDP port number of the destination 1 Net mask pattern for IP
211. g table lists I O signals The device X is an input signal from the RJ71EN71 to the CPU module The device Y is an input signal from the CPU module to the RJ71EN71 The I O signals differ when the network type is Ethernet and Q compatible Ethernet When network type is Ethernet signals xo Module failure On Module failure Off Module normal X1 to XE Use prohibited XF Module ready On Module operation possible Off Module operation not possible X10 to X1F Use prohibited 1 This signal enabled when the network type for the P2 connector is set to CC Link IE Field For details on operation of the signal refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application Output signals YO to Y1F Use prohibited Fonty Do not use turn on any use prohibited signals as an input or output signal to the CPU module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system For the I O signals of the P2 connector when its network type is set to CC Link IE Control refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Controller Network User s Manual Application For the I O signals of the P2 connector when its network type is set to CC Link IE Field refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application APPENDICES APPENDIX 189 Appendix 2 1 Signals When the network type is Q compat
212. get modules The control CPU of the RJ71EN71 or the CPU module connected to the same hub as the engineering tool The control CPU of the RJ71EN71 or the CPU module connected to cascade connected hub By setting Not Respond to Network CPU Module Search in Security under Application Settings to Do Not Respond the modules will not be listed even if a search is performed Only the MELSEC iQ R Series Ethernet equipped modules are searched RJ71EN71 in which the network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet cannot be searched 1 FUNCTIONS 1 9 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product and GOT When module does not appear after search If a connected Ethernet equipped module does not appear in the list after searching the modules on the network check the following items Search cannot be performed if it is disabled with the IP filter function Modules connected via a router cannot be searched If the module is connected via a wireless LAN packet loss can prevent the Ethernet communication from stabilizing and may inhibit the module search If there are modules with the same IP address in the list review the IP address parameter settings for the Ethernet equipped module If the service processing load of the search target CPU module or CPU module with RJ71EN71 is high it may not be possible to search for the corresponding module If the search cannot be performed increase the response wait time in the s
213. gt RJ71EN71 Port 1 Module Parameter Ethernet gt Basic Settings Setting Item Setting Parameter Editor 192 0 1 100 Disable Disable All SLMP Binary Open by Program lt Detailed Setting gt 1 FUNCTIONS 76 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 6 Set the network configuration in the following item 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt RJ71EN71 gt Port 1 Module Parameter Ethernet gt Basic Settings gt External Device Configuration 18 Ethernet Configuration Start 1 0 0000 Ethernet Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Fixed Buffer _ RC 2 ique SemeDevce _ Protocol Send Receive Setting IP Address PortNo MAC Address Host Name IP Address Port No Subnet Mask Host Station 192 0 1 100 Active Connection Module Fixed Buffer No Procedure Send 192 0 1 100 8192 192 0 1 101 40 7 Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the system XZ Online gt Write to PLC Point In this example default values were used for parameters that are not shown above For the parameter setting refer to the chapter explaining the parameters in this manual 2 Page 124 PARAMETER SETTINGS llReceiving side 1 Setthe CPU module and add the module labels of the CPU module The setting method of the CPU module a
214. he CPU module and external device is not connected because of a connected cable disconnection and others the data send processing may end normally Thus providing a communication procedure and sending receiving data is recommended Use the SP SOCCSET instruction to change the external device with the CPU module Open completion signal Un G1900000 to Un G1900007 and Open request signal Un G1900008 to UnXG 1900015 for the connection set to UDP IP is always on Do not execute the GP CONCLOSE instruction or SP SOCCLOSE instruction the program If the GPA CONCLOSE instruction or SP SOCCLOSE instruction is executed the open completion signal and open request signal for the corresponding connection will turn off The close processing will be executed and send receive will be disabled To re open a closed connection execute the GP CONOPEN instruction or SP SOCOPN instruction 1 FUNCTIONS 1 4 Socket Communications Broadcast communications Broadcast communications is a communication method that does not specify the external device Data is exchanged between all Ethernet equipped module stations and external devices on the same Ethernet to which the Ethernet equipped modules are connected Item Description Broadcast sending The same data is sent to all Ethernet devices on the same Ethernet Broadcast receiving The data sent with broadcast send is received Setting procedure Set External Device Configuration
215. he control panel so that only qualified maintenance personnel can operate it Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Operating Precautions NCAUTION When changing data and operating status and modifying program of the running programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation Incorrect change or modification may cause system malfunction damage to the machines or accidents Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the setting values in the buffer memory are being written to the flash ROM in the module Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM again Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Disposal Precautions NCAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details on battery regulations in EU member states refer to the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual Transportation Precautions NCAUTION When transporting lithium batt
216. he receive packet expected packet If it matches the receive processing ends If the verification does not match the received data is discarded Ethernet equipped module Receive data 1 Not Patched Header Data Receive packet expected packet 4 Discarded External device Data Receive data 2 i Sieen receive packets eaer be specified Received The operation image of Receive Only is shown below When the instruction completed successfully ECPRTCL instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Ethernet equipped module i Receive data The receive data matched the receive packet expected packet External device Receive data APPENDICES APPENDIX 231 Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol When the instruction completed with an error timeout error An error has ECPRTCL instruction occurred Completion device turns on upon abnormal end The device Completion device 1 t waiting time to receive or the time specified by the destination alive check timer Ethernet equipped module The receive data A did not match the A receive packet expected packet External device Receive data Receive data 1 When the receive packet expected packet verification does n
217. hernet V2 0 Frame Invalid MTU 1500 byte Automatic Negotiation Not Use RJ71EN71 FTP Timer Settings Command Input Monitoring Timer Unit zi Response Monitoring Timer Explanation Set parameters for the Ethemet frame Frame Settings Set parameters for the Ethernet frame Page 131 Frame Settings Communication Speed Set the communication speed between the module and the external device Page 132 Communication Speed FTP Server Settings Set the file transfer function FTP server Page 133 FTP Server Settings Time Setting 2 Set the time setting function SNTP client Page 134 Time Setting Timer Settings for Data Communication Set the timer used for the following communications Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT Communications using SLMP Communications using the predefined protocol Socket communications Communications using a fixed buffer Communication using the random access buffer File transfer function FTP server Page 135 Timer Settings for Data Communication Security Set the security measures for access to the Ethernet equipped module Page 138 Security Gateway Parameter Settings Set to communicate with an external device on Ethernet via a router and gateway Page 138 Gateway Parameter Settings Network Station No IP information setting Set to communicate with another network module by network number and
218. hod 7100H Settings IP Address IP Address A012H Subnet mask A012H Default Gateway A013H Communications by Network No Station No 7100H Setting Method 7100H Network Number 7100H Station No 7100H Transient Transmission Group No A010H Enable Disable Online Change A030H Communication Data Code A031H Opening Method A031H External Device Configuration A031H Application Frame Settings A036H Settings Communication Speed 7100H FTP Server Settings A037H Time Setting A039H Timer Settings for Data Communication A038H Security IP Filter Settings Disable Direct Connection with MELSOFT A034H Do Not Respond to CPU Module Search A034H Gateway Parameter Settings A013H Network Station No lt gt IP information setting A033H Interrupt Settings Interrupt Occurrence Factor A014H Channel No Connection No A014H Detection Method A014H Interrupt Pointer A014H Comment A015H IP Packet Transfer Setting A030H Network Dynamic Routing A030H Module Operation Mode 7100H 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 183 3 6 List of Parameter Numbers 3 7 00100 00110 00120 00130 00140 00400 00800 00901 00902 00903 00904 00905 00906 00907 00908 00909 0090 00C02 00000 00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 Event List This section lists the events occurs in Ethernet System Link up Link up has occurred when the network cable connected to the external device was connected TCP connec
219. ial Store the IP address in the relay SM on special register SD by the IP address storage device write operation pec Ta ge area syslem memory 501520 IP address IP address SD1521 501522 Subnet Subnet mask Write mask 501523 pattern execution pattern SD1524 Default om 520 Default router router Bus 501525 address IP address connection Power off and on O Operate with the IP address stored or reset the CPU in the IP address storage area module system memory Point This function can be used by manipulating the special relay and special register values from the GOT Refer to the list of special relays and special registers in the following manual for details on the special relays and special registers used with this function LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application CPU module IP address The value set with the module parameters during initial processing is set as the CPU module IP address When this function is used the IP address set when the CPU module is initialized is the value stored in the IP address storage area system memory instead of the value set in the parameters When using parameters Parameter file CPU module Module parameter IP address 192 168 3 39 Subnet mask pattern 255 255 255 0 192 168 3 254 IP address Subnet mask pattern 192 168 3 39 255 255 255 0 192 168 3 254
220. ible Ethernet With the Q compatible Ethernet the same I O signals as the MELSEC Q series Ethernet interface module can be used except in some cases The following table lists the differences of the RJ71EN71 and MELSEC Q series Ethernet interface modules X1C ERR LED lit confirmation COM ERR LED lit confirmation On Lit Off On Lit Off Y17 ERR LED off request COM ERR LED off request On At off request Off On At off request Off Y19 Use prohibited Initial request signal On At request Off 1 This signal turns on when the ERR LED or the P ERR LED of P1 is on or flashing 2 The details are listed below The ERR LED and the P ERR LED of P1 turn off An off request continues to be issued while this signal is on Does not light while on The event is registered in event history when off process is executed This signal cannot be turned off during major error If the error occurs again after turning on and off the ERR LED or P ERR LED will turn on or flash according to the details of the error Currently occurring error and error history information is not cleared For details on the other I O signals refer to the following Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic 0 PointP may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Do not use turn on any use prohibited signals as an input or output signal to the CPU module Doing so 1
221. ically applied to the Ethernet equipped module Specification format binary abbreviated bin bye Function Closes the connection with the FTP and quits the FTP Specification format bye Same function quit close Function Closes the connection with the FTP server Specification format close delete Function Deletes files stored in the CPU module Specification format delete file path name Example When deleting files stored in the SD memory card delete 22MAINSEQ1 PRG Similar command mdelete dir Function Displays the file name date of creation and volume of files stored in the CPU module Specification format dir drive name Example When displaying the detailed information of files stored in the data memory dir 4A Similar command Is get Function Reads a file from the CPU module Specification format get source file path name destination file path name Example 1 When reading files stored in the SD memory card and store with same file name get 22MAINSEQ1 PRG Example 2 When reading files stored in the SD memory card and store with different file name get 2 SEQ1BAK PRG SEQ SEQ10LD PRG Caution If the destination file path name FTP client side is not specified the file is stored in the FTP client side with the same file name as the source file name CPU module side transfer destination is in the currently connected directly when FTP is started and connected Is Function Displays the names of files stored in the CPU module
222. ication data is configured of the header and application data Header The header is for TCP IP or UDP IP The RJ71EN71 automatically adds and deletes the header so it does not need to be set llDetails of header section size The details of the header section data format and size are shown below TCP IP Ethernet 14 bytes IP 20 bytes TCP 20 bytes UDP IP Ethernet 14 bytes IP 20 bytes UDP 8 bytes 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Communications Using the Random Access Buffer 87 Application data The application data expresses the following data code as binary code or ASCII code Switch between the binary code and ASCII code with Own Node Settings under Basic Settings 5 Page 125 Own Node Settings Format When exchanging data with binary codes Application data area command message Maximum of 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1017 words A A Xx Y WS Text uu Data length command Communication Subheader Start address setting none at read request source 1 00H L H L H request em Text Communication response request destination Subheader End code none at write request Y Y 1 byte 1 byte Maximum of 1017 words Ss Application data area Response When exchanging data with ASCII codes Application data area command message
223. ications Using a Fixed Buffer 61 62 External devices capable of data exchange Data can be exchanged with the following external devices Devices in Ethernet to which the RJ71EN71 is connected Device connected via router As the following figure shows the external device for communication and the working application for send receive and Procedure Exist No Procedure are set in the External Device Configuration using each fixed buffer No 1 to No 16 and the external device for each buffer is fixed Fixed buffer No 1 For sending data to the external device 1 F 4 Fixed buffer No 2 For receiving data from the external device 1 External device 1 Fixed buffer No 3 For receiving data from the external device 8 ES External device 8 Fixed buffer No 16 For sending data to the external device 28 Ee External device 28 Pay attention to the following when changing the external device During TCP IP communications the external device can be changed only when a connection is not established with the external device when the open completion signal is off During UDP IP communications the external device can be changed regardless of the connection status with the external device When changing the external device do not use the pairing open or alive check function Processing duri
224. ified port number C1BOH The open processing of the specified connection has Do not perform the open processing to a connection been already completed already opened When communications with the external device cannot be performed perform the close processing before the open processing C1B1H The open processing of the specified connection has not After completion of the open processing perform the been completed communication C1B2H The open or close processing using CONOPEN Execute again after the CONOPEN CONCLOSE OPEN CONCLOSE OPEN CLOSE instruction is being executed in the specified connection CLOSE instruction is completed 176 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes C1B3H Another send or receive instruction is being executed in the specified channel Change the channel number Execute again after the send or receive instruction is completed C1B4H The specified arrival monitoring time is incorrect Set the arrival monitoring time to a value within the allowable range C1B8H The RECV instruction was executed for the channel that Correct the execution condition of the RECV had not received data instruction for the channel that had received data Correct the specified channel of the RECV instruction C1B9H The CONOPEN OPEN instruction cannot be executed Correct the specified connection for the specified connection C1BAH The dedicated
225. ifying the files specified with the FTP command on the FTP client external device side supported by the Ethernet equipped module With the CPU module the drive name and file name are distinguished when specifying the file t When specifying a file in the CPU module with FTP specify the target file with the following arrangement Specification format Drive name Folder name File name Extension Example 3 MAINSEQ1 QDR other than drive 2 2 LOGGING LOG01 00000001 LOG01_00000001 CSV drive 2 Specification details Refer to the following Page 103 Drive name drive No Page 104 Folder name file name and extension 51 Use as the delimiter 2 file name can be specified only when specifying a file stored in drive 2 The section enclosed in square brackets in the specification format can be omitted Drive name drive Specify the drive name of the target memory for transferring the file For the correspondence of the CPU module target memory and drive names refer to the following C Page 101 Files that can be transferred with FTP Omitting the drive name is the same as specifying the program memory drive 4 1 FUNCTIONS 1 03 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server Folder name file name and extension Specify the folder name and file name according to the rules provided in the following manual LLIMELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application The name det
226. in Error Information in the Module Diagnostics window 2257 Page 151 Error Information 1080H The number of writes to the flash ROM has exceeded Replace the module 100000 1120H Clock setting has failed when the system is powered on Check if the time settings are correctly set in or the CPU module is reset parameter Check if the specified SNTP server is operating normally and there is no failure on the network accessing to the SNTP server computer 1124H default gateway is not set correctly Correct the default gateway IP address Parameter information gateway IP address is not set correctly Set the same network address as that of the Parameter type default gateway gateway IP address network address No address after the subnet mask is different from that of Parameter No the IP address of the own node Network No Station No 1128H The port number is incorrect Correct the port number 1129H The port number of the external device is not set Correct the port number of the external device correctly 112DH The data was sent to the external device while the IP Correct the IP address of the external device in the address setting of the device set the external device external device configuration configuration is incorrect Check that the IP address class of the external device in external device configuration is set to A B C 1
227. in the word device in another station ACPU For details on link dedicated instructions refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Data communication procedures This section describes the procedure for communication with link dedicated instructions 1 After the module parameters are set check that the RJ71ENT7 1 initial processing has completed normally Initial status Un G1900024 0 On 2 Datais exchanged with link dedicated instructions Point P Communication with the link dedicated instructions uses the MELSOFT connection UDP port so the open close processing is not required Setting procedure 1 Setthe network number and station number in Own Node Settings under Basic Settings 5 Page 126 Communications by Network No Station No 2 Setthe send destination station information in Network Station number IP Related information setting under Application Settings lt Page 141 Network Station No lt gt IP information setting 1 1 This setting is not required when specifying the target station with an IP address using the READ instruction SREAD instruction WRITE instruction or SWRITE instruction control data 1 FUNCTIONS 97 1 7 Link Dedicated Instruction Communication 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server The server function of FTP File Transfer Protocol used to transfer files with the external device is s
228. ineering tool executed automatically Remote password check operation Communication that is checked The Ethernet equipped module checks the remote password for a communication request made to the own station or other station received from the external device When checking a remote password for modules with multiple connections the connection for which the remote password is set RJ71EN71 CPU module Remote password Path checked using Own station 0 remote password gt Path not checked using a remote password iq Another station Engineering tool CPU module pers aal EQ A ll Remote 1 Remote password i password 5 1 Engineering tool a RJ71EN71 1 The remote password check is set so the communication request from the external device is not accepted If the remote password check is not set the communication request can be accepted and data can be exchanged from the external device 116 1 FUNCTIONS 1 10 Security Function Accessible station The station accessible from the external device when a remote password is set for the CPU module and the station that can unlock lock the remote password are limited to those in the same network number The following figure shows an example of when the remote password is set for multiple stations in the system Ex 1 Station 1 2 1
229. ing instructions Data length n setting 1 L n 2 H L Send receive data n 3 H L n setting data length H L 1 word 2 bytes When exchanging data with ASCII codes Command format k Maximum of 5112 words 36H L L L e L 5 Subheader A A A Data specifying storing device for sending receiving instructions ASCII binary conversion Data length setting Send receive data Maximum of 2556 words 1 word 2 bytes 1 FUNCTIONS 73 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 74 End code The error code is stored the end command added to the response 5 Page 186 End Codes Returned to an External Device During Data Communications The end code is also stored in the BUFSND instruction and BUFRVC instruction completion status area inside control data The following cases may apply if an error code for communications using SLMP or random access buffer is stored even when executing communications using a fixed buffer The data length specified in the application data section of the message sent Specify the actual data size in the text section as the data length in the from the external device to the RJ71EN71 differs from the actual data size application data section Refer to the following descriptions the text section The subheader of the message sent from the ext
230. instruction 1 ended completion device 1 Open completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 Internal processing Internal processing After the module parameters are set checks that the initial processing for the Ethernet equipped module has completed normally Initial status Un G1900024 0 On Start the open processing using the OPEN instruction Open request signal connection No 1 Un G1900008 0 On The Ethernet equipped module executes the open processing only internal processing Data be exchanged after the open processing completes normally Start the close processing using the CLOSE instruction Open request signal connection No 1 Un G1900008 0 Off Q The Ethernet equipped module executes the close processing only internal processing Data communication ends when close processing completes normally APPENDICES APPENDIX 22 Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications 5 Appendix 6 Communications with Different Networks Different network stations can be accessed with dedicated instructions or the engineering tool allowing seamless communication CC Link IE Controller Network Network No 1 Engineering tool Relay station Ethernet CC Link IE Field Network Network No 3 Network No 2 The following functions are used to c
231. instruction was executed with the Execute the dedicated instruction after the initial initialization not completed processing is completed C1BBH The target station CPU type of the link dedicated Correct the specified target station CPU type instruction is incorrect C1BCH The target network number of the link dedicated Execute the link dedicated instruction again after instruction is incorrect correcting the network number When specifying another network station check if the routing parameters are set correctly C1BDH The target station number of the link dedicated instruction Execute the link dedicated instruction again after is incorrect correcting the target station number When specifying another network station check if the routing parameters are set correctly C1BEH The command code of the dedicated instruction is Execute again after correcting the command code at incorrect the request source If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are set correctly and take action C1BFH The channel used in the dedicated instruction is Execute again after correcting the used channel within incorrect the allowable range at the request source If the request source is on another network check if the routing parameters are set correctly and take action C1COH The transient data is incorrect Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation If the
232. ion destination specified by the SLMP message C060H The request details for bit devices of the SLMP message Correct the request details and send the SLMP message is incorrect to the Ethernet equipped module again C061H The request data length of the SLMP message does Check and correct the text or request data length and not match with the number of data in the character a part of text The write data length specified by the label write command is not even byte send the SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again Add the dummy data for one byte and specify the length by even byte 174 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes C070H The device memory cannot be extended for the access destination specified by the SLMP message Correct the SLMP message to read write data without the device memory set for extension Specify the extension of the device memory only for an Ethernet equipped module mounted station and a R Q QnACPU via CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 C0O71H The number of device points for data read write set for Correct the number of read write points and send the modules other than a R Q QnACPU is out of the range SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again C072H The request details of the SLMP message is incorrect Check if the data can be requested to the access For example a request
233. ion error has occurred with MELSOFT Do no execute the specification of the direct direct connection connection when direct connection is not used Do not power off the system or reset the CPU module or remove the cable during the communications when direct connection is used 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 181 C810H Remote password authentication has failed when required Set a correct password and perform password authentication again C811H Remote password authentication has failed when Set a correct password and perform password required authentication again one minute later C812H Remote password authentication has failed when Set a correct password and perform password required authentication again 5 minutes later C813H Remote password authentication has failed when Set a correct password and perform password required authentication again 15 minutes later C814H Remote password authentication has failed when Set a correct password and perform password required authentication again 60 minutes later C815H Remote password authentication has failed when Set a correct password and perform password required authentication again 60 minutes later C816H The security function was activated and remote Set a correct password and perform password password authentication cannot be performed authentication again after a certain period of time C840H Number of transient requ
234. ions have not been performed for a certain period of time and waiting to see whether the response is received 2 Do not confirm existence TCP IP UDP IP Alive check is not performed 1 The connection may be disconnected if the external device does not support the TCP KeepAlive function response to KeepAlive ACK message 2 The Ethernet equipped module automatically sends an echo response packet when it receives a PING echo request command It sends a response to the received PING command even if the connection used in the data communications with the external device is closed If a response message cannot be received from the external device or if an error has been detected using the alive check function the following are performed The corresponding connection will be forcibly closed The line is disconnected Open the connection again using a user program Open completion signal is turned off and the error code is stored in the buffer memory areas 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 2 Basic Settings 129 130 2 3 Application Settings Set frame or communication speed of the Ethernet equipped module JLIEN I E E Module Paramete Setting Item List Timer Settings for Data Commur Security Gateway Parameter Settings Network Station No lt gt IP info Interrupt Settings IP Packet Transfer Setting Network Dynamic Routing Module Operation Mode Setting Et
235. ire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction 1 Emergency stop circuits protection circuits and protective interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward reverse rotations or upper lower limit positioning must be configured external to the programmable controller 2 When the programmable controller detects an abnormal condition it stops the operation and all outputs are Turned off if the overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the power supply module is activated Held or turned off according to the parameter setting if the self diagnostic function of the CPU module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error 3 All outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part such as I O control part where the CPU module cannot detect any error To ensure safety operation in such a case provide a safety mechanism or a fail safe circuit external to the programmable controller For a fail safe circuit example refer to General Safety Requirements in the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual 4 Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a relay and transistor in an output circuit Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident n an output circuit when a load current exceeding the ra
236. ith an error timeout error of waiting time to receive An error has K occurred ECPRTCL instruction Completion device i The device i i m turns on upon abnormal end i i i i Completion device 1 t waiting time to receive or the time specified by the destination alive check timer Waiting time to send Ethernet equipped module Send packet 4 4 Send packet Receivedata Receive data External device The receive data did not match the receive packet expected packet 1 When the receive packet expected packet verification does not match before the reception wait time or when other device existence cannot be checked within the destination alive check time time calculated from destination alive check start interval timer value destination alive check interval timer value and destination alive check resend count Point For details on errors that occur when the communication completed abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory Page 169 List of Error Codes APPENDICES APPENDIX 234 Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Verification operation of receive packet This section describes the receive packet expected packet verification operation for communication with an ex
237. itial processing Initial normal completion status bO 0 1 Initialization normal completion Initial abnormal completion status b1 0 1 Initialization abnormal completion b2 to b15 Use prohibited initial error code Un1G1900025 Un G1900025 Stores the information when the RJ71EN71 when using Ethernet function initial processing is completed abnormally 0 In initial processing or initial normal completion Other than 0 Initial processing error code Error code is stored edef upport function check area protocol ready Un G1901002 Un G1901002 Stores the ready status of the protocol setting data 0 1 Ready APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 215 fined protocol setting data check area llPredefined protocol setting data error information Un G1901020 to Un G1901023 Un G1901020 Protocol number When a protocol setting data error is detected stores the protocol number where the error was detected Protocol is checked in order from smallest protocol number The protocol number where an error was detected first is stored 0 No error 1 to 128 Protocol number 65535 Cannot identify Un G1901021 Setting type 0 is stored if an error is detected in the packet setting or element setting 1 is stored if an error is detected in the protocol detailed setting Valid when protocol number value is 1 to 128 0 Packet setting or element
238. itial processing is checked Initial status Un G1900024 0 On A connection is established with the RJ71EN71 and external device and normal completion of the connection No 1 open processes is checked 1 Page 219 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications Data is received from the external device Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection 1 Un G1900016 0 On The BUFRCV instruction is executed and the receive data length and receive data are read from the fixed buffer No 1 Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection No 1 Un G1900016 0 Off The receive processing ends If the data reception completes abnormally execute the BUFRCV instruction again and start the receive processing Point P The details of the open setting are enabled at the rising edge of the RJ71EN71 open completion signal Execute the BUFRCV instruction when the socket fixed buffer reception status signal changes from OFF to ON The socket fixed buffer reception status signal does not turn on when abnormal data is received In addition data is not stored in the fixed buffer No 1 area 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Reception with interrupt program procedure exists Use the BUFRCVS instruction for receiving data with the interrupt program The interrupt program is started when data is received from the external device It enables the reading of receive data to the
239. iving Receives the data in order from the low order byte Byte Swap by Word When sending Interchanges the bytes in word units and sends the calculated length When receiving Interchanges the bytes in word units and receives the data Calculating Start Select the start packet element number for the range to be calculated Range The range is 1 to 32 End Select the end packet element number for the range to be calculated The range is 1 to 32 1 This can be selected only when the data length is set to 4 bytes Point If there are no elements other than length an element error occurs When using length one or more elements other than length are required If the calculation result exceeds the number of digits set with Data Length the excessive digit value is discarded invalidated For example if the data length is 2 bytes and the data size calculation results are 123 bytes the data length will be 23 If there is a non conversion variable variable length non verified reception character length variable after the length and that section is not included in the length calculating range arrange the static data immediately after the non conversion variable non verified reception When the code type setting is ASCII Hexadecimal a mismatch will occur if a character string other than to 9 A to and to f is received Use 0 to 9 or A to F when converting t
240. iving process An example of the external device receiving process is shown below Communication processing on the external device y Request message send processing Response message receive processing The TCP connection is closed Is the TCP connection open Receive the remaining response messages Were the data received within the monitoring timer value Timeout of the monitoring timer value The received data size is insufficient Check the received data size If the response message to the next request has been received Response message processing ave all the received messages been processed End Error processing Point When communicating with Ethernet the TCP socket functions socket functions are used in the personal computer There is no concept of boundary with these functions When the send side calls the send function once and sends data the receiving side must call the recv function once twice or depending on the circumstance more times to read that data send and recv do not correspond one on one Thus the external device s program process must execute the receiving process as shown above APPENDICES APPENDIX 239 Appendix 10 Example of External Device Program Appendix 11 Added and Enhanced Functions The following table lists the added and enhanced functions in the Ethernet equipped module RJ71EN7
241. le When using the file transfer function FTP server do not specify 20 or 21 for socket communications When using the time setting function SNTP client do not specify 123 for socket communications Reading received data If Socket fixed buffer reception status signal UnXG 1900016 to UnXG 1900023 is on read the received data The communication could be affected if large amounts of data are not read out for a while Accessing a file during communication The CPU module prioritizes the file access processing over the Ethernet communication processing Thus if the file is accessed with FTP the engineering tool and so on during socket communications the socket communications processing could be delayed To access a file while monitoring the response time with the external device with socket communications add the time required for accessing the file to the monitoring time 1 FUNCTIONS 9 1 4 Socket Communications 5 60 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Communications using a fixed buffer uses TCP IP and UDP IP to send and receive arbitrary data with the external device connected to the Ethernet with dedicated instructions in the same manner as exchanging data with socket communications Arbitrary data can be exchanged between the CPU module and external device using the RJ71ENT71 fixed buffer The following table lists the differences with socket communications are given below Connection send receive
242. le Operation Mode Has the initial processing been completed normally Check Initial status Un G1900024 0 3 If the initial processing has not been completed successfully correct the module parameters 27 Page 124 PARAMETER SETTINGS Does the communication data code ASCII or binary setting match with that of the external device If the data code settings do not match data cannot be sent or received because the external device cannot normally decode commands 2 Set the same data code as that of the external device in Communication Data Code under Own Node Settings of Basic Settings 25 Page 125 Own Node Settings Is the target connection in forcibly invalidated state in the Force Deactivation Status column in the Status of Each Connection tab of the Ethernet Diagnostics window Turn off the area corresponding to the target connection in Forced connection invalidation setting area Un G5646 to Un G5650 to cancel the forced invalidation Is the access from the Ethernet equipped module denied by the security setting of the external device Correct the security setting such as firewall of the external device When the problem cannot be solved with above actions check the error cause according to the communication processing and take action 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 161 1 2 3 4 162 Communications using SLMP Page 164 Communications usin
243. le or the external device If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module or CPU module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3C00H A hardware failure has been detected Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3C01H A hardware failure has been detected Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 171 3C02H A hardware failure has been detected Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3C03H A hardware failure has been detected Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3COFH A hardware failure has been detected Take measures t
244. lement Setting Static Data Fixed data 400 2 1 Non conversion Variable Serial No D3 DSlfFised Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Sway Static Data Fixed data 0000 28 yte Non conversion Variable Network No Non conversion Variable Station No Non conversion Variable Requested module 1 0 Static Data For future expansion 0011 Byte Length Response data length Object element9 10 HEX Reverse 2B Static Data End code 0000 28 pte oo co ro Non conversion Variable Error response Response data Change Type Add New Paste Delete Element Fixed data Element Setting D400 2B yte Non conversion Variable Serial No D374 D374 Fixed Lenath 2B yte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data Fixed data 0000 28 yte Non conversion Variable Network No 0375 0975 Lenath 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Station No D376 D376lfFixed Length 1Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Requested module 1 0 No D377 D3977 Fixed Lenath 2B yte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data For future expansion OOf1 Byte Length Response data lenath Object element9 15 HEX Reverse 2B pte Non conversion Variable End code
245. lilTable Conversion System This system uses the network number station number IP address set in the conversion table of the Network Station number lt gt information The UDP port number predefined for the Ethernet equipped module is used as the UDP port number of the destination If duplicate network and station numbers are set in the conversion table the data set with the younger registration number is used If no data is registered in the conversion table communication may not be performed successfully Conversion processing of the table conversion system is as below When a communication request message command frame to access other station is received the same network number and station number are searched in the conversion table of the Network Station No IP information and the communication request message is sent to the destination station with the corresponding IP address The response message response for the communication request message is returned based on the return IP address and the data in the conversion table above 144 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings Ex Conversion table registration example The following shows the example of conversion table registration based on the network map 2 Communication relay receiving station Network No 1 Station No 12 IP Address 192 0 1 12 1 Communicati CPU module RJ71 EN71 on request source station
246. ll Port 1 Connection No 1 Connection No 1 Port 1 Connection No 2 Connection No 2 Port 1 Connection No 3 Connection No 3 Port 1 Connection No 4 Connection No 4 Port 1 Connection No 5 Connection No 5 Dat 1 Cannantian MAC fCannantinn Ma System Connection Valid Setting Connection Port 1Enable All F Port 2Enable All Caution Please enable the existence confirmation function to use the UDP IP protocol Port 1 Auto open UDP Port Port 1 FTP Transmission Port TCP IP Port 1 MELSOFT Transmission Port TCP IP Port 1 MELSOFT Transmission Port U Port 1 MELSOFT Direct Connection Dart 2 Mta anan HDD Dart port is enabled the existence automatically Auto open UDP Port MELSOFT Transmission Port TCP IP MELSOFT Transmission Port UDP IP irse rare confirmation function will MELSOFT Transmission Port UDP IP Dedicated Instruction CC Link is enabled unable to use the these relay function mee 1 Register the remote password on the Register Password window XZ Password button 2 Select the module for which the remote password is to be applied and set the start I O number 3 Setthe target connection on the Remote Pass
247. lowing item XZ Project gt New Series di Ropu m zj Program Language Ladder x Coa 2 Click the Yes button to add the module labels of the CPU module Do you want to add the module label of the following installed modules Module Name RO4CPU Start 1 0 No 3E00 7 Do Not Show this Dialog Again This setting can be changed in the Options dialog 1 FUNCTIONS 7 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 5 3 Set the RJ71EN71 in the following item 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Right click Add New Module Module Selection Module Information Module Viodule Name RJ7LEN71 E E Port 1 Network Type Ethernet Port 1 Station Type Port 2 Network Type Ethernet Port 2 Station Type Advanced Settings Mounting Position Mounting Base Main Base Mounting Slot No 0 Start I O No Specification Not Set Start No 0000 Number of Occupied Points per 1 Sh 32 Points 4 Click the Yes button to add a module label of the RJ71EN71 Do you want to add the module label of the following installed modules Module Name RI71EN71 E E Start 1 0 0000 El Do Not Show this Dialog Again This setting can be changed in the Options dialog C d 5 Set the Basic Settings in the following item 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information
248. lt The client receives data and sends back the response to the data oe Receive processing Close request Close processing e MM Be Close request cioserequest MM The packet to stop communications is exchanged then the connection is disconnected Response Closed Closed Point P Wait at least 500ms or more before executing the open processing again after the close request is sent from the external device to the Ethernet equipped module 220 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications Active open procedure Active open is a connection method that performs an active open processing in respect to an external device Passive open that is in a passive open standby state for a connection The following figure shows the process for the Ethernet equipped module to Active open For OPEN CLOSE instruction refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Ex Open close processing for connection No 1 Parameter communications Power on completed Open status Open enable status closed Closed status Initial status Un G1900024 0 OPEN instruction OPEN instruction completion device OPEN instruction completion device 1 1 CLOSE instruction X Y 4 H 1 scan
249. ltaneously the Ethernet equipped module can communicate with the external device in MELSOFT connection regardless of the registered data in the conversion table If the IP address and port number cannot be obtained when IP address calculation system table conversion system or combination system is set the Ethernet equipped module will obtain them using the automatic response system and send a response to the external device 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 141 2 3 Application Settings Automatic Response System This system differs from the other conversion method in that specification can only be made when the own station is the communication request destination station or communication relay receiving station Relay communications via other networks can be performed easily because the IP address and port number of the destination station are not required to be set Communication request source station CPU RJ71 module EN7 1 Ethernet E El Communication relay receiving station xt Communication relay sending station CPU RJ71 RJ71 module 71 71 The automatic response System be set Ethernet CPU RJ71 module EN7 1 Communication request destination station Communication relay station a Communication Communication Next relay receiving relay sending Response i station station message L m E Previous Station Conversion processin
250. m anywhere as long as they are addressed to the Ethernet equipped module itself If a communication request is received from an external device the corresponding port number is occupied until that processing ends Even if another communication request is accepted during this time the communication processing will be waited 1 FUNCTIONS 2 1 2 SLMP Communications 5 List of valid commands The following table lists the commands that can be executed from the external device to the Ethernet equipped module in the Sub commana field differs according to the specified device For details on each command refer to the following SLMP Reference Manual Device Read 0401 0001 Reads value from the bit devices consecutive device No one point units 0000 Reads values from the bit device consecutive device No 16 point units Reads value from the word devices consecutive device No in one word units 0003 Writes value to the bit devices consecutive device No in one point units 0002 Writes value to the bit devices consecutive device No in 16 point units Writes value to the word devices consecutive device No in one word units Write 1401 0001 Writes value to the bit devices consecutive device No in one point units 00110 Writes value to the bit devices consecutive device No in 16 point units Writes value to the word
251. me Files with read only attributes and files that are locked from a function other than FTP cannot be written A write error will occur if attempted The write files cannot be transferred if the SD memory card is write protected A write error will occur if attempted A temporary 1 is automatically created when writing the file is first three digits of start I O number is the hardware port number to which FTP client is connected The file is changed to the write target file name when the work is completed but if the power is turned off or reset during file write the temporary file for work may be saved In this case delete it with the file delete command delete mdelete If the file register is set to the refresh device do not write or delete that drive When writing a large file to the SD memory card enter the STOP state first A communication error may occur if writing is attempted in the RUN state The number of files that can be written into the specified drive is maximum maximum number of files that can be written to CPU module 1 file For details on the maximum number of files that can be written to the CPU module refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup 110 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server Deleting files Decide the timing for deleting the files for the entire system including the CPU module and engineering tool Files with
252. mmunications UDP IP Communications The BUFSND instruction is executed Sends data The data length amount of send data in the fixed buffer No 1 area is sent to the external device When the external device receives the data form the RJ71EN71 returns response to the RJ71EN71 Q When a response is received from the external device the RJ71EN71 finishes data send If the response is not returned within the response monitor timer value a data send error occurs 1 If the data send completes abnormally execute the BUFSND instruction again and start the send processing 1 Adjust the monitor timer value with the parameters 25 Page 135 Timer Settings for Data Communication Point The details of the open setting are enabled at the rising edge of the RJ71EN71 open completion signal Send the next data command after the data exchange has been completed for the previous data command send When sending or receiving data to multiple external devices the data can be sent sequentially However to avoid communication trouble it is recommended to switch the external device and send receive the data When using a connection opened with UDP IP the setting value in the communication address setting area can be changed before sending or receiving to switch the external device 1 FUNCTIONS 63 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer No procedure The following figure shows the send processing for the fixed buffe
253. multiple MELSOFT products Connection via a hub Connection by specifying the network number and station number Direct connection Connection without specifying the IP address network number or station To connect by using network number and station number To connect multiple MELSOFT products and GOTs To connect without hub using one Ethernet cable for one on one communication with the external device To connect to an Ethernet equipped module whose IP address in number unknown 1 This connection method is not available when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet 7 For the procedures to connect the Ethernet equipped module and GOT refer to the following Manual for the GOT used Connection via a hub Setting procedure Setting in the Ethernet equipped module side Set the IP address of the Ethernet equipped module in Own Node Settings under Basic Settings Page 125 Own Node Settings When connecting by specifying the network number and station number set the network number and station number in Own Node Settings under Basic Settings Even if External Device Configuration is not set under Basic Settings the Ethernet equipped module can be connected to 1 the MELSOFT product and GOT using the system dedicated connection i 4 When using a TCP IP connection with the system dedicated connection up to maximum number o
254. n number D3 Requested module I O 3FFH Because the access destination is the receiving side CPU module control CPU of the receiving No side RJ71EN71 3FFH is stored D4 Monitoring timer 10H The monitoring timer is set to 4 seconds Unit 250ms D5 to D6 Head device No 100 To read D100 to D109 start device number is set to 100 D7 Device code A8H To read D100 to D109 device code is set to A8H D8 Number of device points 10 To read 10 points from D100 to D109 number of device points is set to 10 In this program example a receiving side program is not required 1 FUNCTIONS 4 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 5 52 1 4 Socket Communications Using dedicated instructions arbitrary data can be exchanged with an external device connected by Ethernet over TCP IP or UDP IP Use this for bidirectional communication one on one with an external device Ethernet Receive or broadcast receive External device Ethernet equipped module Send Broadcast send External device Broadcast send External device Point For examples of socket communications refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup Socket communications cannot be used when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet Setting procedure Set External Device Configuration under Basic Settings 25 Page 127 E
255. n setting the subnet mask specify the target settings of the IP address class network address and subnet address so that all bits are 1 in the mask pattern Specify the mask pattern with a decimal hexadecimal value obtained by dividing the 32 bit mask value into 8 bit segments When the subnet mask is not specified the mask pattern setting is not necessary The following mask value is used as the mask pattern according to the own station IP Address class Class A FF 00 00 00H Class B FF FF 00 00H Class C FF FF FF 00H eS The conversion setting is required to obtain the IP address from the network number and station number using the table conversion system If the own station is an Ethernet equipped module and the next station to which the communication request response message is passed to access other station is also an Ethernet equipped module specify the network number station number and IP address of the Ethernet equipped module of the next station 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 146 2 3 Application Settings Interrupt Settings Set the parameters required for starting up an interrupt program Description Setting range 2 SEND Instruction Data Reception Reception Connection Default Blank Interrupt Occurrence Factor Set the interrupt cause Channel No Connection No Set the start condition of an interrupt program When Interrupt SEND Instruction Data Reception 1 Occurren
256. n the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp The SD and SDHC logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of SD 3C LLC All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 246 SH NA 081257ENG D SH NA 081257ENG D 1504 MEE MODEL R ETHER U OU E MODEL CODE 13JX16 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
257. nd other series The communication path cannot be set automatically for Ethernet equipped modules connected via a router Set the communication path manually Page 227 When the networks consist of MELSEC iQ R series and other series When the networks consist of MELSEC iQ R series and other series Setting communication paths allows communication with the following networks configured with modules other than MELSEC iQ R series Ethernet CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 llSetting procedure Use the following procedure 1 Setthe network number station number and transient transmission group number in the Own Node Settings under Basic Settings Page 126 Communications by Network No Station No 2 Setthe send destination station information in Network Station No IP information setting under Applied Settings 7 Page 141 Network Station No lt gt IP information setting 3 Setcommunication paths in Routing Setting of the CPU parameters QA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application APPENDICES APPENDIX 227 Appendix 6 Communications with Different Networks Appendix 7 Processing Time Calculate the minimum processing time for each function with the following formula Note that the processing time may be even longer due to the network load rate line congestion each connected device s window size number of connections being us
258. nd addition method of the module label are the same as those of when setting the sending side 25 Page 75 Sending side 2 Set the RJ71EN71 and add the module labels of the RJ71EN71 The setting method of the RJ71EN71 and addition method of the module label are the same as those of when setting the sending side 25 Page 75 Sending side 3 Setthe Basic Settings in the following item XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt RJ71ENT7 1 Port 1 Module Parameter Ethernet gt Basic Settings Setting Item IP Address 192 0 1 101 Subnet Mask Default Gateway Communications by Network No Station No Disable Setting Method Use IP Address Network Number Station Transient Transmission Group No 0 Enable Disable Online Change Disable All SLMP Communication Data Code Binary Opening Method Do Not Open by Program Detailed Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 77 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 78 4 Set the network configuration in the following item XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt RJ71EN71 gt Port 1 Module Parameter Ethernet gt Basic Settings gt External Device Configuration na Ethernet Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting PLC Sensor Device Communication Method Protocol Send Receive Default Setting IP Address Port No MAC Address Host Name
259. ned check if the correct IP address was specified in the command If not correct the IP address and send the command again If a response was returned check the end and error codes to correct the error Is the communication method of the connection used for communication with the external device is set to an item other than Random Access Buffer in the External Device Configuration window of Basic Settings Correct the communication method setting if an item other than Random Access Buffer is set 122 Page 127 External Device Configuration If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure Page 153 Module communication test 1 The buffer memory address is for when the network type of the RJ71EN 71 is set to Ethernet and the P1 connector is used When using the P2 connector or the CPU module or setting the network type to Q Compatible Ethernet refer to the following lt Page 191 Buffer Memory 2 If the connection of only the external device is closed due to cable disconnection personal computer restart or other reasons reopen the connection using the same port used before the error occurred The E71 does not close a connection if it receives an Active open request again from the external device with a different IP address or a port number A dedicated instruction is not completed If the dedicated instruction is not completed when u
260. ng tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C44AH A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C44BH A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C44CH A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C44DH A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action
261. ng Setting of the CPU parameters Are multiple link dedicated instructions with same channel setting executed simultaneously Set different channel to each instructions Shift the execution timing of the link dedicated instructions If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure Page 153 Module communication test 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 167 168 ng the file transfer function FTP server cannot be performed When the Ethernet equipped module cannot be accessed from the external device FTP client using the file transfer function FTP server check the following items and take action Is the file transfer function FTP server for the Ethernet equipped module enabled Set FTP Server under FTP Server Settings of Application Settings to Use Page 133 FTP Server Settings Are the login name and password correct Check the login name and password set in the parameters and log in again gt Page 133 FTP Server Settings Is the IP address entered at login correct Check the IP address of the Ethernet equipped module set in the parameters and log in again 25 Page 126 IP Address Is executed command used properly Check the instructions of the command and use the command properly 1 37 Page 102 FTP command In multiple CPU system is the access destination CPU modul
262. ng data send receive data send When the BUFSND instruction is executed the RJ71EN71 sends data from the corresponding fixed buffer to the external device set in the specified connection lelDuring data reception If the data is being received from an external device set in the specified connection the RJ71EN71 processes the reception If data is being received from an external device that is not set in the specified connection the RJ71EN71 will ignore the received data 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Send procedure The following figure shows the processing order when sending data from the RJ71ENT71 to the external device Procedure exists The following figure shows the send processing for the fixed buffer No 1 area corresponding to the connection No 1 Initial processing Open processing Sending data Receiving a response Initial status Un G1900024 0 9 Open completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 BUFSND instruction ZN BUFSND instruction completion device BUFSND instruction completion device 1 Sending data ACK N TCP only ACK Response TCP only Normal completion of the initial processing is checked Initial status Un G1900024 0 On A connection is established with the RJ71EN71 and external device and normal completion of the connection No 1 open processes is checked Page 219 TCP IP Co
263. ng of the connection specified for pairing open has been already completed Check that none of the connections targeted for pairing open has been opened Correct the combination of modules set for pairing open C018H The IP address specified value of the external device is incorrect Correct the IP address specified value of the external device C020H The send receive data length exceeds the allowable range Correct the data length to be sent When the amount of data to be sent exceeds the limit divide the data into smaller chunks to send it 172 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes C021H An abnormal end response was received for communications using a fixed buffer and random access buffer Check the command response type of the subheader Check the data length setting to be sent Check if the communication data code setting of the Ethernet equipped module meets the binary ASCIl of the message to be sent C022H Aresponse could not be received within the response Check the operation of the external device monitoring timer value Correct the response monitoring timer value of the The connection with the external device was closed Ethernet equipped module while waiting for a response Check the open status of the connection with the external device C024H Communications using a fixed buffer or Check that there is no error in the co
264. ng protocol Add protocol XZ Edit gt Add Protocol Adds new protocol Selection of Protocol Type to Add Predefined Protocol Library Select from Predefined Protocol Library WIND UN Model ad protocol name Protocol to Manufacturer Model Protocol Name General purpose protocol SLMP Device Read Type Select the type of protocol to be added Predefined Protocol Library User Protocol Library Add New Protocol No Select the protocol number to be added 1 to 128 Manufacturer 1 Set the maker of the protocol to be added Model Set the type of protocol to be added Protocol Name Set the name of the protocol to be added 1 The name can be set only when Predefined Protocol Library is selected for Type 1 FUNCTIONS 3 1 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Protocol Detailed Setting Set the protocol send receive parameters 722 Protocol Setting window gt Select a protocol gt Edit gt Protocol Detailed Setting r Connected Device Information Manufacturer Generatpurpose protocol Type Communication protocol 7 Model simP DevceRead Version on 7 Explanation r Protocol Setting Information Protocol No 1 Protocol 0401 Read word Communication Type Send amp Receive Receive Setting Clear OS area receive dat
265. ngs for connection with the external device Check the operation of the external device or switching hub Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the connection cable is disconnected Check that there is no connection failure with the switching hub Execute the PING test and communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action 1167H Unsent data found but could not be sent Check the settings for connection with the external device Check the operation of the external device or switching hub Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the connection cable is disconnected Check that there is no connection failure with the switching hub Execute the PING test and communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action 1801H IP address of the external device could not be acquired Correct the IP address in the network station number lt gt IP information setting Check if the network or station number of the external device is correctly specified by using control data of the dedicated instruction Parameter information Parameter type No Parameter No Network No Station No 1811H An error was detected in the CPU module Check the error
266. nications with different networks Disable Enable Default Disable Setting Method Select the method for setting the network number and station number lt Page 126 Setting Method Use IP Address Not Use IP Address Default Use IP Address Network Number Enter the network number of the own station when selecting Not Use IP 1 to 239 Address in Setting Method Default 1 Station No Enter the station number of the own station when selecting Not Use IP Address 1 to 120 in Setting Method Default 1 Transient Set the transient transmission group number of the own station 0 to 32 Transmission Group Default 0 No Enable Disable Online Change Select whether to enable external devices to write data in SLMP communications while the CPU module is in RUN state Page 126 Enable Disable All SLMP Enable All SLMP Disable Online Change Default Disable All SLMP Communication Data Code Select the communication data code used for communications Binary ASCII Default Binary Opening Method Select how to open a connection when using UDP IP communications or Passive open of TCP IP communications When Do Not Open by Program is selected a connection is open when the system received the Active request Program for open close processing is not required When Open by Program is selected the open close processing are performed by a program The m
267. nlocks the password This command is used when FTP communication port is specified as a remote password check target port Specification format quote password unlock remote password Remote password Specifies the remote password set in the CPU module parameters The following appears as the execution results when the command ends normally 200 Command Okey The following appears when the remote password does not match 556 Password Error The following appears if another command is requested before the remote password is unlocked 555 Password Locked password lock Example When specifying a remote password 123456 quote password unlock 123456 Caution If the FTP communication port is specified as a remote password check target port when logging in the password will be locked The CPU module files can be accessed by executing this command and unlocking before starting the various FTP operation If the FTP communication port is not specified as a remote password check target port the processing will complete normally when the remote password is unlocked Function Locks the remote password function set for the CPU module This command is executed when the FTP communication port is specified as a remote password check target port Specification format quote password lock The following appears as the execution results when the command ends normally 200 Command Okey Example When locking the remote
268. nnection number communications using a random access buffer were specification of the dedicated instruction executed when communication method is set to the Correct the communication method of the connection Predefined Protocol connection with the external device Predefined protocol was executed when communication method is set to Fixed Buffer Procedure Exist or Fixed Buffer No Procedure connection C025H There is an error in the usage setting area when starting When starting the open by using the CONOPEN the open processing by the CONOPEN OPEN instruction OPEN instruction correct the usage setting area of the or I O signals control data When starting the open by I O signals correct the connection usage setting area of the buffer memory 026 An error has occurred when reading writing verifying the Check that connection cable with the engineering tool predefined protocol setting data is not disconnected and read write verify the predefined protocol setting data again Do not write data simultaneously when writing protocol setting data from multiple engineering tools C027H Message send of the socket communications has failed Check the operation of the external device or switching hub Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the connection cable is disconnected Check that there is no connection failure with the switching hub Execute the c
269. nnot communicate with the external device the connection will be closed gt Page 129 Existence Confirmation KeepAlive UDP Do not confirm existence 1 When Compatible Ethernet is selected in the network type the setting range is 1 to 16 2 This setting is not available for the CPU module 3 This setting is not available when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 128 2 2 Basic Settings Existence Confirmation When the Ethernet equipped module has not communicated with the external device for a certain period of time while the connection is open this function checks whether the external device is alive by sending an alive check message to the device and waiting for the response The following table lists the details on alive check KeepAlive TCP IP This method is used for a connection opened using TCP IP The Ethernet equipped module performs an alive check by sending an alive check ACK message to the external device with which communications have not been performed for a certain period of time and waiting to see whether the response is received The connection will be automatically closed when the open state is not continued UDP UDP IP This method is used for a connection opened using UDP IP The Ethernet equipped module performs an alive check by sending the PING command ICMP echo request response function to the external device with which communicat
270. not is stored All bits are set to 0 if the protocol setting data check result is abnormal 0 No registration 1 Registered Un G1901032 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Un G1901039 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Un G1901040 to Empty Un G1901047 The numbers in the table indicate protocol numbers Se d receive area for predefined protocol support function llSend receive area for predefined protocol support function Un G1902000 to Un1G1904047 This area is used for sending and receiving data during communication with predefined protocol APPENDICES APPENDIX 216 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Appendix 4 Dedicated Instruction This section describes the dedicated instruction that can be used in Ethernet For details on dedicated instructions refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks The following table lists the dedicated instructions used for open or close processing Available Not available GP CONOPEN Establishes a connection SP SOCOPEN x GP CONCLOSE Closes the connection x SP SOCCLOSE x CLOSE protocol communications The following table lists the dedicated instructions used for communications using the predefined protocol Available Not
271. nsigned Bit String 16 bit VAR_GLOBAL bO uSendErD Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit VAR_GLOBAL 010 sd uCloseEmlD Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit vaR atoBaL D30 uSendData Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit 0 3 VAR GLOBAL M RJ71EN71 EE Refresh Data 0081 MFRJ71EN71 EE Refresh Data 00 Data Refresh FB bRunfefr s ON SM400 MO 1 Bi bEN o bENO B EN71 1 DUT i_stModule 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 79 68 93 275 279 80 71 71 1 bStartop bnComp bnStatus bStartOp 2n onnectionO nnection penExecuti 1 on 1 SET 1 Vt yt M20 M RJ71EN71 EE ConnectionOpen_00B_1 MFRJ71EN71 EE ConnectionOpen 00 Connection Open FB EN71 EE 1 uCompl bStartOp eon Eh bRunOpe d ernetlniti D alized O M20 M2 1 1 Bii bEN o bENO B bOpen_O K SET EN71 EE 1 DUT i_stModule o bOKB M3 bOpen N G SET uConnectionNo o bErcB M4 uOpenE 1 ouEriduwl pbi bUseParameters 0 pbi uProtocol 0 pbi uOpen System 0 pbi uConnUsage 0 pbi bProcedure 0 pbi uExist Confirm 0 pbi uLocal Port No 4096 pbi uTarget Port No 4096 pbi u2IP Address 0 pbi bEnable Online Change pbi bData Code bStartOp bOpen O en RST M3 1 H MI bStartOp POBSRN enFB RST M4 1
272. number of read write points from to the random Correct the number of read write points and send the device of SLMP message is out of the allowable range in SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again the CPU module in units of words double words C055H The read write size from to the file data of SLMP Correct the read write size and send the SLMP message message is out of the allowable range to the Ethernet equipped module again C056H The read write request exceeds the largest address Correct the start address or the number of read write points so that the request does not exceed the largest address and send the data to the Ethernet equipped module again C057H The request data length of the SLMP message does not Check and correct the text or request data length and match with the number of data in the character a part of send the SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped text module again C058H The request data length of the SLMP message after the Check and correct the text or request data length and ASCII binary conversion does not match with the number send the SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped of data in the character a part of text module again C059H The specified command and subcommand of the SLMP Check that there is no error in the specification of the message are incorrect command and subcommand of the SLMP message 5 The Ethernet equipped module cannot read write data Correct the specificati
273. number range If the module that received the message returns a response communication is normal 722 Ethernet Diagnostics window gt Communication Status Test button Communication Status Test ES Setting Item Execute Network No Cancel Number of Start Station No End Station No Confirmation PING Test Stations 10 Communication Time Seconds Close Result Station IP Address Code 3 Change IP Address Display DEC HEX Number of Response Stations Restriction The communication status test cannot be performed when the Ethernet function of the CPU module is used llProcedure Set the required items in Setting Item and click the Execute button to execute the communication status test The test results are displayed in the Result box 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 9 3 3 Checking the Network Status 5 Action for abnormal end If the communication status test fails No Response or an error code is displayed the IP Address Error Code field in Result No Response No error The initial process for the Ethernet equipped module has not been completed normally There is an error in the line connection to the Ethernet equipped module Cable disconnection line disconnection or others Correct the module parameters Check the cable Check the hub and gateway The IP address of the Ethernet equipped module is incorrect The class or subnet address
274. o ASCII characters during send When arranging multiple length elements none of the length calculating range may overlap When arranging multiple length elements the previous length calculating range may not exceed the arranged length Alength element cannot be arranged at the final position of the packet elements 1 FUNCTIONS 37 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 38 i conversion variable Element Name Unit of Stored Data Byte Swap Fixed Length Variable Length Data Length Maximum Data Length Send Data Storage Area Specifiable Device Symbol X Y M L B D W R ZR G Buffer Memory Fxedtengh gt 1 Setting Range 1 to 2046 Lower Byte Upper Byte v Disable Lower gt Upper Data Storage Area Specification Use this to send the CPU module device or buffer memory data as part of the send packet or to store part of the received packet in the CPU module device or buffer memory Multiple non conversion variable can be arranged in one packet The following table lists the items Element Name Set the element name Fixed Length Variable Length Fixed Length The data whose length is fixed is sent and received Variable Length When sending The data length is specified at the time of the protocol execution and the data is sent When receiving The data whose length is variable is received Data Length Maximum Data Length
275. o reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3C10H A hardware failure has been detected Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3C11H A hardware failure has been detected Take measures to reduce noise Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3C13H A hardware failure has been detected Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3C14H A hardware failure has been detected Reset the CPU module and run it again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module or CPU module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3C2FH 3E01H An error was detected in the memory Network type of the own station is unexpected setting Reset the CPU module and run it again
276. o the specified number of points exceed the largest Data cannot be read from written to an area with an address after the addresses device number and step number for each process last address Correct the specified address The byte length of a command is not within the range defined by the Correct the block number specifications In the block number specification of the extension file register do not When data is written the set number of write data points is different specify a block number exceeding the range of the corresponding from the specified number of points memory cassette size A monitor request was issued even though monitoring data is not registered 58H The start address start device number and start step number of a Correct the value to the one within the range that can be specified for command specified by an external device has been set outside the each process range that can be specified Correct the block number For data read write in a microcomputer program or file register values Correct the device specification exceeding the CPU module parameter setting range has been Correct the command or specified device specified A block number specified for an extension file register does not exist A file register cannot be specified A word device has been specified for the command for bit devices The start number of bit devices has been specified using a value other than a multiple of 16 in the
277. o the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Programmable controllers must be installed in control panels Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock For wiring refer to the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual For Ethernet cables to be used in the system select the ones that meet the specifications in the user s manual for the module used If not normal data transmission is not guaranteed Startup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Also do not expose it to liquid or strong shock Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode ignite or leak resulting in injury and fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws connector screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock Startup and Main
278. ods ace eemper ema bea Re Gee aon E bp iron a a e ego 120 Checking the IP address s ses iet em aa eh Leda xx a Re RO ERR RR DES 122 Precaution Sarsa eaa aaa a 122 CHAPTER 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 124 2 1 525220025 ies eben im E uae eRe ign ee ase eae 124 2 2 ICD ME DMSTT 124 Own Node Settings bes LR Re CPU Rd p a Rep gia EO Dang 125 External Device Configuration ped EE REY GR RR ER OPER ds a d Eres 127 2 3 Application Settings isss cocina tek een eene eee eee c wie eee 130 6 gt 2 5 522 dds bem ELCHE te Ee br Bex Reo dq Ee RR arista d 131 Communication Speed 132 FTP SerVer Settings o erre teu Er nA Rr pe A d dud aser Pine d to ese ab barbie 133 Time Setting EEL ITTMTTMSMT 134 Timer Settings for Data Communication 135 rel eeens perena ere pe wy De ee ee ae 138 Gateway Parameter 5 n 138 Network Station No lt gt IP information 141 Interrupt 05
279. odule cannot communicate when the CPU module is in STOP state Do Not Open by Program Open by Program Default Do Not Open by Program 1 This setting is not available for the CPU module 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 125 2 2 Basic Settings IP Address Address When the parameters are written without setting the IP address the following address is set Module IP address RJ71EN71 P1 connector 192 168 3 40 P2 connector 192 168 4 40 CPU module 192 168 3 39 Communications by Network No Station No Setting Method When Use IP Address is selected network number and station number will be set from the third and fourth octet of the IP address For example when IP address is set to 192 168 1 10 the network number is set to 1 and the station number is set to 10 When the IP address is used the value out of the range of the network number and station number cannot be set in the third octet and fourth octet When Not Use IP Address is selected set the network number and station number Point When Port 1 Network Type and Port 2 Network Type are set to Ethernet for the RJ71EN71 and the same network number is set for both of P1 and P2 P1 is always used for relay to other networks Enable Disable Online Change Select whether to enable SLMP data write command received by the Ethernet equipped module received while the CPU module is in RUN state This setting is e
280. of 0 to 65535 Un G11600 Connection No 1 continuous unlock failure count Un G11601 Connection No 2 continuous unlock failure count Un G11662 Connection No 63 continuous unlock failure count Un G11663 Connection No 64 continuous unlock failure count Un G11664 Auto open UDP port continuous unlock failure count Un G11665 MELSOFT transmission port UDP IP continuous unlock failure count Un G11666 MELSOFT transmission port TCP IP continuous unlock failure count Un G11667 FTP transmission port TCP IP continuous unlock failure count Un G11668 MELSOFT direct connection continuous unlock failure count access buffer area MRandom access buffer Un G20000 to Un G26143 This area is used for reading or writing the data when exchanging data with the random access buffer e nformation area type information Un G65535 Un G65535 Stores the network type 0 Ethernet 1 CC Link IE Field Network 2 CC Link IE Controller Network 3 Ethernet Q series compatible munication using a fixed buffer Fixed buffer No 1 Un G65536 to Un G70655 This area is used for sending and receiving data during fixed buffer communication For addresses corresponding to connections after the connection No 2 refer to the following Page 191 List of buffer memory addresses Un G65536 Data length Stores the data length of the fixed buffer data Un G65537 to Un G70655 Fixe
281. of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 245 TRADEMARKS Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation i
282. of the CPU module and take action using the module diagnostics of the engineering tool 1830H Number of reception requests of transient transmission link dedicated instruction exceeded upper limit of simultaneously processable requests Lower the transient transmission usage frequency and then perform again 1845H Too many processings of transient transmission link dedicated instruction and cannot perform transient transmission Correct the transient transmission execution count 20E0H The module cannot communicate with the CPU module The hardware failure of the CPU module may have been occurred Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 2160H Overlapping IP addresses were detected Check and correct the IP addresses 2220H The parameter setting is corrupted Check the detailed information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and write the displayed parameter If the error occurs again even after taking the above the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Parameter information Parameter type 170 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 2221H The set value is out of the range Check the detailed information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool and correct the parameter setting corresponding to the displayed number
283. om access 96 1 7 Link Dedicated Instruction 97 Applicable dedicated instructions 4 97 Data communication 1 97 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP 98 Data communication 99 Files that can be transferred with 101 FIP COMMANA E DEUmT 102 sie ide dos des eae ag a a ee a era aed 110 1 9 Time Setting Function SNTP 111 1 10 Security Function esee meyer hr ey dew ee RU Re VY a aie rare 113 IP filter TUNCHON sooo EEG qudd des 113 Remote 1 41 4271 2 114 1 11 IP Address Change Functi n ie o uar Rp Rp E ba 119 address 2s egre RR ERR ph sedo ee RE x E vd dd 119 Usage meth
284. ommunicate with different networks Communications using SLMP External device C Page 23 SLMP Communications CA SLMP Reference Manual Communications using the link dedicated CPU module on another station t Page 97 Link Dedicated Instruction Communication instruction Communications with other stations using the Engineering tool GX Works3 Operating Manual engineering tool UDP IP communications is used to communicate with other networks Data is always exchanged as binary codes Communications can be made with stations up to eight networks apart number of relay stations 7 226 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 6 Communications with Different Networks When the networks consist of only MELSEC iQ R series Communication paths are automatically set for communication with the following networks of MELSEC iQ R series Ethernet CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network Setting procedure Use the following procedure 1 Set the network number station number and transient transmission group number in the Own Node Settings under Basic Settings Page 126 Communications by Network No Station No 2 Setthe Network Dynamic Routing under Application Settings to Enable Point Communication paths are automatically set but they can also be manually set To set communication paths manually refer to the following 227 When the networks consist of MELSEC iQ R series a
285. ommunication the Ethernet equipped module functions as a server and the external device terminals such as a personal computer functions as the client The server Ethernet equipped module automatically returns a response message suitable for the request message received from the client Request message Header Subheader Access Command destination Ethernet Response message Header Subheader Response data 1 Server side Ethernet equipped module 2 Client side External device 1 FUNCTIONS 1 2 SLMP Communications Data communication procedures This section describes the procedures for communicating with SLMP 1 After the module parameters are set the system checks that the initial processing of the Ethernet equipped module has ended normally Initial status Un G1900024 0 On 2 Perform the open processing to establish a connection between the Ethernet equipped module and external device Page 219 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications 3 After the connection is established the SLMP messages are sent from the external device 4 Close the connection when communication is finished Point P In the following case the Ethernet equipped module performs a remote password check when the external device is accessing the programmable controller If communication is not possible unlock the remote password 25 Page 116
286. ommunication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C028H Message send of the fixed buffer has failed Check the operation of the external device or switching hub Since there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the connection cable is disconnected Check that there is no connection failure with the Switching hub Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C029H Description of control data is not correct Correct the descriptions of the control data Open instruction was executed through open settings Set the open settings parameters Execute the OPEN parameter even though parameters are not set instruction through control data C035H The existence of the external device could not be Check the operation of the external device checked within the response monitoring timer value Correct the timer setting for data communication of the Ethernet equipped module Check if the connection cable is disconnected C040H Not all the data could be received within the response Correct the data length of the communication data monitoring timer value Sufficient data for the da
287. on data area command message m Maximum of 4 bytes 4 bytes 5112 words A v 52 A x Data length Text Communication Supneanet setting command request source HJ IL H L Communication request destination Subheader End code H L H L N A 2 byte 2 byte v Application data area Response 1 FUNCTIONS 71 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 72 MSubheader The RJ71EN71 automatically adds and deletes the header so it does not need to be set Binary code b7 bO b7 E b0 ra ofo Jiri titi PE Subheader Subheader ASCII code b7 b7 01111 0 0101010 1 1 1 0 07 07 070 6 4 gt 6H 0 lt gt 0H E 4 gt EH 0 lt gt 36H 30H 30H 30H 30H Subheader Subheader lllData length setting Shows the amount of data in the text command section When exchanging data with binary codes Maximum 5113 words When exchanging data with ASCII codes Maximum 2556 words 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Text command Shows the format of the command response When exchanging data with binary codes Command format Maximum of 5113 words OOH L H H O L Subheader A Data specifying storing device for sending receiv
288. on error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C441H A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C442H A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C443H A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C444H A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take
289. on image of each communication type of protocol 230 Verification operation of receive 235 Example of packet element 236 Appendix 10Example of External Device Program 239 Appendix 11Added and Enhanced Functions 240 Jnl vamRC TTL 240 INDEX 242 ARIS IMEEM 244 WARRANTY bea endende NER D Rura 245 TRADEMARKS ARE RAUS dex a RES doe ads evened es 246 RELEVANT MANUALS MELSEC iQ R Ethernet User s Manual Application Functions parameter settings programming troubleshooting I O Print book SH 081257ENG this manual signals and buffer memory of Ethernet e Manual EPUB PDF MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup Specifications procedures before operation system configuration Print book SH 081256ENG wiring and communication examples of Ethernet CC Link IE e Manual Controller Network and CC Link IE Field Network EPUB PDF MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Startup Performance specifications procedures before operation and Print book SH 081263ENG troubleshooting of the CPU module e Manual EPUB PDF MELSEC iQ R Prog
290. on of the device to be read write from to the device specified by the SLMP message and send the SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again 5 The Ethernet equipped module cannot read write data Correct the specification of the device to be read write from to the device specified by the SLMP message and send the SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again 5 The received request data of the SLMP message is Correct the request data and send the SLMP message to incorrect the Ethernet equipped module again C05DH The Monitor Request command is received before the Register the monitoring data using Monitor Registration monitor registration is performed by Monitor Clear command and perform monitoring Registration Clear command of the SLMP message CO5EH The time between received the SLMP message from the Increase the monitoring timer value Ethernet equipped module and returned response from Check if the access destination is operating normally the access destination exceeded the monitoring timer Correct the network number or request destination value set in the SLMP command station number If the access destination is a module with a different network number correct the routing parameter setting f the access destination is a module with a different network number check if the network number is not in use CO5FH This request cannot be executed to the access Correct the access destinat
291. on time Un G11001 to Un G11007 Un G11001 Year Stores the year that the time setting function was executed Un G11002 Month Stores the month that the time setting function was executed Un G11003 Day Stores the date that the time setting function was executed Un G11004 Hour Stores the time hour that the time setting function was executed Un G11005 Minute Stores the time minute that the time setting function was executed Un G11006 Second Stores the time second that the time setting function was executed Un G11007 Day of the week Stores the day of the week that the time setting function was executed 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Time setting function required response time Un G11008 Un G11008 Stores the time required for the module to set the time after sending to the SNTP server Range 0 to FFFEH Unit ms Time setting function SNTP client execution Un G11009 Un G11009 Executes the time setting function when bO is turned on The time setting function can be executed at a random time from a program The function is not executed if bO is turned on during execution of the time setting function This is valid only when Use is set for Time Setting SNTP Client under Time Setting in Application Settings IP packet transfer latest data volume Un G11050 to Un G11051 Un G11050 to Un G11051 Stores the l
292. on with Ethernet port of CPU built in Ethernet Set PC side I F to Ethernet Board Double click Ethernet Board and open the PC side 1 F Detailed Setting of Ethernet board window Set the network number station number and protocol of the personal computer Set the network number and protocol according to the settings for the Ethernet equipped module Set the station number so that it is not the same as a station number assigned to other Ethernet devices Set the PLC side I F to the module to be connected 1 FUNCTIONS 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product and GOT 17 18 Please select Connection via HUB when you use PLC Type HUB even ae ae eee Network No 1 HUB is connected to other devices Ethernet Port IP Address 2 Direct Connection is selected during communication Ta ibe Host Name becomes overloaded This might affect other devices communication Station No lt gt IP Information Search for Ethernet module on network Response Wat Time 2 Seconds Display Only CPU Type of Project V Search for Ethernet module on the same network Unable to search for the following cases No response within a specific time period Connected via router or subnet mask is different 5 Double click the icon set in step 4 and open the PLC side I F Detailed Setting window 6 Select Connection via HUB for
293. onnection invalidation system port Un G5650 Un G5650 Set the system port to be forcibly invalidated 0 Use allowed 1 Use prohibited The bits corresponding to each system port are shown below 50 Auto open UDP port b1 MELSOFT application transmission port UDP b2 MELSOFT application transmission port TCP b3 FTP transmission port b4 MELSOFT direct connection APPENDICES APPENDIX 211 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory protocol support function execution status check area Connection No 1 Un1G8300 to Un G8335 The execution status of the predefined protocol support function is stored For addresses corresponding to connections after the connection No 2 refer to the following Page 191 List of buffer memory addresses Un G8300 Protocol execution status Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 1 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Un G8301 System area Un G8302 Received data verification result receive packet No 1 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 0 Verification matched 1 to 32 Element No where the verification result did not match FFH Verification not performed cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Un G8303 to Un G8317 Received data ve
294. onversion Settings Set the information of the external device Page 146 Conversion Settings PointP When transferring messages which are sent to other stations specifying network number and station number to another network the Gateway Parameter Settings is required gt Page 138 Gateway Parameter Settings Network Station No lt gt IP information setting is required when other stations are accessed via other Ethernet network systems and must be registered in all the Ethernet equipped module which has the network number and station number Setting System Select the system to obtain the IP address and port number of the external device from its network number and station number There are four methods as shown below The items required to be set Subnet Mask Pattern and Conversion Settings differ depending on the method Setting is required x Setting is not required Automatic Response System IP Address Calculation System Table Conversion System O X O Xx OIO x x Combination System Point In MELSOFT connection using UDP IP if the external device is not registered in the conversion table of table conversion system the Ethernet equipped module communicates with the device using the automatic response system Therefore even when both of communications with different networks using the link dedicated instruction and MELSOFT connection are performed simu
295. or which access rights can be controlled Number of settable modules A remote password can be set for up to eight modules including the modules other than the Ethernet equipped module When using the multi CPU system configuration up to eight units can be set for each CPU module 114 1 FUNCTIONS 1 10 Security Function Set on the Remote Password window 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Remote Password Please enter the password re enter the password to confirm and then click OK Password Peed Re enter Password PasswordStrengh enter the password with 6 to 32 single byte characters numeric characters ert single byte space 80 lt xen D Passwords are case sensitive oc cne i Set the password which authenticated the access connection from external devices No Product Name Start I O No Module Conditions 1 CC Link IE Built in Ethernet I F Module 7 0000 Detail Setting 2 3 4 5 X 6 7 8 Remote Password Setting Required Settings NotSet Already Set Clear Select the connection to enable Only the port in which User Connection No Valid Setting Connection No Ethernet was selected as a network type can be enabled Port 1Enable All F Port 2Enable A
296. ore if the IP address set in the Ethernet equipped module s External Device Configuration is set to be blocked with the IP Filter Settings the IP filter setting is valid and communication with the external device is blocked Precautions If there is a proxy server in the LAN line block the IP address for the proxy server If passed it will not be possible to prevent access from personal computers that access the proxy server Remote password Permits or prohibits access from the external device to the CPU module via the Ethernet equipped module This function can prevent illegal access of the CPU module from a remote location Point P The remote password is one method of preventing illegal access such as program or data destruction from an external device It does not completely prevent illegal access Incorporate measures other than this function if the programmable controller system s safety must be maintained against illegal access from an external device Mitsubishi shall not be held liable for any system problems that may occur from illegal access Examples of measures for illegal access are given below Install a firewall Install a personal computer as a relay station and control the relay of send receive data with an application program Install an external device for which the access rights can be controlled as a relay station Contact the network provider or equipment dealer for details on the external devices f
297. ork No and station No Logical sum 0 3 0 5 Partner station IP Address T 9 0 0 0 3 0 5 For class B When the own station IP address is 8438FA0AH When the net mask pattern for routing other networks is FFFF0000H When the destination network number is 03H and the station number is 05H Own station IP Address 8 4 3 8 F A 0 A Net Mask Pattern 1 Logical product F F 0 0 0 0 Logical product value 8 4 3 8 0 0 0 0 Network No and station No Logical sum 0 3 0 5 Partner station IP Address 8 4 3 8 0 3 0 5 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 143 2 3 Application Settings For class C When the own station IP address is CA65300AH When the net mask pattern for routing other networks is FFFFFFOOH When the destination station number is 02H The network number is not used Own station IP Address 6 5 3 0 0 Net Mask Pattern Logical product F F E a E 2 0 0 Logical product value 6 5 3 0 0 0 Network No and station No Logical sum 0 2 Partner station IP Address 6 5 3 0 0 2 Point IP address configuration of class A 31 30 2423 16 15 0 Class Momo Host address IP address configuration of class B 31 30 29 1615 0 Class Network address Host address IP address configuration of class 31 29 28 E 87 E 0 Class Network address Host address
298. ot match before the reception wait time or when other device existence cannot be checked within the destination alive check time time calculated from destination alive check start interval timer value destination alive check interval timer value and destination alive check resend count Point When variables are included in receive packet expected packet elements variable data are not verified Up to 16 receive packets expected packets can be specified When multiple packets are specified the received data is verified with the registered receive packet expected packet in the order of registration The receive processing is completed when a matching receive packet expected packet is found and the subsequent verification is canceled The number of the matching received packet is stored in the control data of the ECPRTCL instruction and the buffer memory For details on errors that occur when the communication completed abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory 25 Page 169 List of Error Codes 232 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol For Send amp Receive communication type The packet is sent once If the send completed successfully the module shifts to the receiving standby state When data is received from the external device it is verified with the receive packet expected packet If it matches the receive processing ends
299. password quote password lock 108 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server run Function Sets the CPU module to the RUN state remote RUN Clearing of the device memory can be specified when entering the RUN state Specification format quote run mode clear mode Mode Specify whether to forcibly execute remote RUN 0 Normal RUN default 1 Forced RUN Clear mode Specify to clear initialize CPU module device memory at start of operation during remote RUN 0 Do not clear device default 1 Clear other than latch area 2 Clear all including latch range The following message appears as the execution results when the process ends normally 200 Command successful Example 1 When executing the remote RUN with normal RUN and do not clear device memory specified quote run Example 2 When executing the remote RUN with forced RUN and do not clear device memory specified quote run 1 Example 3 When executing the remote RUN with forced RUN and clear other than latch area memory specified quote run 11 Caution Forced RUN is used only when CPU module remote RUN is not possible due to trouble in the device that remote STOPPED the CPU module and the CPU needs to be forcibly remote RUN with another device With normal RUN a CPU module that is in the STOP PAUSE state by another device cannot be set to the RUN state Specify clearing of the device memory by the clear mo
300. perform the test again If the test connection error fails again Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3 External self loopback test Replace the Ethernet cable and perform the test again If the test fails again Please consult your local communication error Mitsubishi representative 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 3 3 2 Checking the Module Status 5 3 3 Checking the Network Status The communication status of the Ethernet equipped module and external device can be checked with Ethernet diagnostics XZ Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics Target Module Specification Change IP Address Display Change Port No Display YO Address 0000 Opec Que Status of Each Connection status of Each Protocol Connection status Te _ Disconnected e a Dsconnected Communication Status Test Set the Ethernet equipped module to be diagnosed in Target Module Specification 154 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 3 Checking the Network Status of Ea Each Connection The status of each connection of the Ethernet equipped module selected Target Module Specification Change IP Address Display Change Port No Display Board i Porti Address 0000 CCPU M PicNo 1 DEC Ope HEX Monitoring Status of Each Connection status of Each Protocol Connection status Communication
301. r No 1 area corresponding to the connection No 1 Initial processing Open processing Sending data Initial status Un G1900024 0 Open completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 BUFSND instruction BUFSND instruction completion device BUFSND instruction completion device 1 ACK Sending data TCP only Normal completion of the initial processing is checked Initial status Un G1900024 0 A connection is established with the RJ71EN71 and external device and normal completion of the connection No 1 open processes is checked 1 Page 219 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications The BUFSND instruction is executed Sends data The data length amount of send data in the fixed buffer No 1 area is sent to the external device The RJ71EN71 finishes sending the data If the data send completes abnormally execute the BUFSND instruction again and start the send processing Point During DUP IP communications if the RJ71EN71 internal processing completed normally the data send processing may end normally even if the communication line between the CPU module and external device is disconnected because of a connection cable disconnection or other causes Thus providing a communication procedure and sending receiving data is recommended 64 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer Receive procedure The following figure show
302. rameter setting refer to the chapter explaining the parameters in this manual Page 124 PARAMETER SETTINGS llReceiving side 1 Setthe CPU module and add the module labels of the CPU module The setting method of the CPU module and addition method of the module label are the same as those of when setting the sending side 25 Page 43 Sending side 2 Set the RJ71EN71 and add the module labels of the RJ71EN71 The setting method of the RJ71EN71 and addition method of the module label are the same as those of when setting the sending side 25 43 Sending side 3 Setthe Basic Settings in the following item 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt RJ71EN71 gt Port 1 Module Parameter Ethernet gt Basic Settings Item Setting E OwnNodeSains OUO Parameter Setting Method Parameter Editor IP Address IP Address 192 0 1 101 Subnet Mask Default Gateway zi Communications by Network No Station No Disable Setting Method Use IP Address Network Number Station No Transient Transmission Group 0 Enable Disable Online Change Disable All SLMP Communication Data Code Binary Opening Method Do Not Open by Program External Device Configuration External Device Configuration Detailed Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 4 Set the network configuration in the following item 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module
303. ramming Manual Instructions Standard Instructions for the CPU module link dedicated instructions socket e Manual Functions Function Blocks communications fixed buffer communications instructions EPUB SH 081266ENG PDF SLMP Reference Manual The protocol SLMP used for data reading or writing from an external Print book SH 080956ENG device to the Ethernet equipped module e Manual EPUB PDF This manual does not include information on the module function blocks For details refer to the Function Block Reference for the module used Point e Manual refers to the Mitsubishi FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool e Manual has the following features Required information can be cross searched in multiple manuals Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual The hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked 13 14 TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Description ARP The abbreviation for Address Resolution Protocol This protocol is used to obtain the MAC address of Ethernet from an IP address Buffer memory A memory in an intelligent function module where data such as setting values and monitoring values are stored When using the CPU module the memory is indicated for storing data such as setting values and monitored
304. rd remote password unlock processing from the external device that requested the unlock processing of the remote password C205H When another station was accessed the remote When accessing another station do not set the remote password could not be unlocked password on the relay station or access station or do not execute the remote password check on them C207H The file name has too many characters Name the file with 255 characters or less C208H The password length that is specified during unlock Set the remote password within 6 to 32 characters processing or lock processing of the remote password is out of range C400H The ECPRTCL instruction was executed when Execute the ECPRTCL instruction after Predefined Predefined protocol ready is not completed protocol ready has turned on Execute the ECPRTCL instruction after rewriting the protocol setting data to the Ethernet equipped module If the error occurs again even after taking the above the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C401H The protocol number specified by the ECPRTCL Correct the specified protocol number and execute the instruction is not registered in the Ethernet equipped instruction again module Register the protocol specified protocol number to the Ethernet equipped module C402H Aerror has occurred in the protocol setting data Correct the protocol setting data and register it again
305. re as follows ASCII string ABC ASCII string 20H to ASCII control code STX ASCII control code Control code of 00H to 1FH and 7FH HEX FFFF HEX Hexadecimal data of 00H to 3 6 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Element Name Code Type Data Length Data Flow Calculating Range Start Calculating Range End The length code is used when there is an element that indicates the data length in the packet When sending Automatically calculates the data length in the specified range and adds it to the packet When receiving From the received data the data value corresponding to the length is verified as the specified range s data length Length elements can be placed anywhere in the data part Multiple length elements can be set placed in one packet The following table lists the items Element Name Set the element name Code Type Select the data length type ASCII hexadecimal HEX Data Length Select the data length on the line The range is 1 to 4 bytes Data Flow Forward Direction When sending Sends the calculated length in order from the upper byte This cannot be set if the Upper byte Lower byte When receiving Receives the data in order from the upper byte data length is 1 byte Reverse Direction When sending Sends the calculated length in order from the low order byte Lower byte Upper byte When rece
306. read only attributes and files that are locked by a function other than FTP cannot be deleted An error will occur if attempted The file cannot be deleted if the SD memory card is protected An error will occur if attempted FTP password The FTP password can be reset with the following procedure when it is lost 1 Read the parameters from the CPU module with the engineering tool 2 Click the Restore the Default Settings button in Application Settings to return all Application Settings to the default values 3 Set the FTP Server Settings and Application Settings again 4 write the set parameters to the CPU module 5 Enable the parameters by powering off and on or resetting the CPU module Point When the FTP password is lost all items set in Application Settings must be reset in addition to the FTP Server Settings Setting a firewall on the FTP client side If the FTP communication is blocked by a firewall on the FTP client side data cannot be exchanged from the FTP server Check the firewall settings enable FTP communication and then access the FTP server Monitoring timer When operation of files such as program PRG and FB file PFB is performed in a CPU module with a large program capacity a timeout may occur due to long processing time on the CPU module If a timeout occurs increase the response monitoring timer value Page 134 Response Monitoring Timer 1 9 Setting Function SNT
307. received side or the data sent in a group may be split on the receive side If necessary the receiving side must check the receive data length and perform the processing If the data length is determined when receiving with the Ethernet equipped module side using the fixed length mode is recommended When receiving on the external device side check the receive data length and perform the processing as shown below Receive processing on the external device side gt v Received message receive processing NO Is TCP connection open Receive the rest of the message TCP connection is closed Received data within the time specified by the monitoring timer value YES NO Check the received data size Sufficient receive data size Processing for the received message Was the entire received message processed v C End C Error handling llPrecautions for Active open Use Open completion signal Un G1900000 to UnXG 1900007 and request signal Un G1900008 to Un G1900015 in the program to create an interlock circuit The on off timing for the open completion signal and open request signal is shown i YES below When disconnected by the Ethernet equipped module Open completion signal ON TCP disconnection completed upon response from the external device Un G1900000
308. red number of connections are connected the connection will be disconnected immediately Connect from the external device after the Ethernet equipped module enters the open standby state The TCP IP connection request received from the external device between the time from CPU startup completion to open wait state causes an error and force close connection is returned to the external device In this case wait for the Ethernet equipped module to enter the open wait state and then retry from the external device Do not execute the GP CONCLOSE instruction or SP SOCCLOSE instruction in the program If the GPA CONCLOSE instruction or SP SOCCLOSE instruction is executed the open completion signal and open request signal for the corresponding connection will turn off The close processing will be executed and send receive will be disabled To re open a closed connection execute the GP CONOPEN instruction or SP SOCOPN instruction Communications using UDP IP Communication with UDP IP uses a simple protocol without order control or re send control Check the following items before performing socket communications using UDP IP P addresses and port numbers on external device side P addresses and port numbers on the Ethernet equipped module side Precautions for UDP IP communications Loss of data data arrival order interchange and others could be occur Consider using TCP IP if there are problems Even if the communication line between t
309. registered in the Ethernet equipped module and the ECPRTCL instruction cannot be executed 178 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes C403H Multiple dedicated instructions was executed simultaneously Do not execute the dedicated instructions which do not support simultaneous execution Correct the specified connection number and execute the dedicated instruction again C404H The protocol being executed by the ECPRTCL instruction Check the canceled protocol in the control data of the was canceled ECPRTCL instruction execution count result and eliminate the cause of the cancellation C405H The protocol number specified by the ECPRTCL Correct the specified protocol number instruction is incorrect C406H The continuous protocol execution count of the Correct the continuous protocol execution count ECPRTCL instruction is incorrect C407H The connection number specified by the ECPRTCL Correct the specified connection number and execute instruction is incorrect the protocol again Correct the specified connection number of the external device in the connection configuration setting of the Ethernet equipped module and execute the protocol again 408 An error has occurred when the send processing of the Check the operation of the external device or switching predefined protocol using the ECPRTCL instruction was hub performed Since there may be congestion
310. ress storage area clear request is turned off and on again while writing to the IP address storage area system memory the clear operation will not be completed This also applies if writing is executed during the clear processing If both SM1520 IP address storage area write request and SM1522 IP address storage area clear request are turned off and on the write operation will be executed as a priority and the clear operation will not be completed 1 FUNCTIONS 1 11 Address Change Function 1 23 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS This chapter describes the parameter settings required for communications between the Ethernet equipped module and external devices 2 1 Setting Parameters 1 Add the RJ71EN71 in the engineering tool 1 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Right click Add New Module 2 The basic setting and application setting are included in the parameter settings Select one of the settings from the tree on the window shown below 722 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter 3 After setting parameters click the Apply button 4 Write the settings to the CPU module using the engineering tool XZ Online gt Write to PLC 5 The settings are reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system 1 Addition of the module is not required when using the Ethernet function of the CPU module 2 2 Basic Settings Set the
311. rification result receive packet No 2 to 16 The configuration is the same as receive packet No 1 Un G8318 Protocol execution count Stores the number of protocol executions in Connection No 1 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions When the number exceeds 65535 the value remains 65535 Un G8319 Protocol cancellation specification Cancels the protocol executed in Connection No 1 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system Un G8320 to Un G8335 System area 1 The following table lists the verification result codes and causes of verification mismatch 00H Normal 01H Insufficient receive data The total packet size of receive data is smaller than that set in protocol data 10H Data not matched The receive data do not match the value set in protocol data 11H ASCII binary conversion error When the code type setting is ASCII Hexadecimal data not in ASCII code are received 12H Data length error The received length value exceeded 2046 bytes 30H Data length size error The Length value received from the external device does not match the actual length FFH Verification not performed APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 212 Un G11000 Stores the operation result of the time setting function 0 Unexecuted 1 Success FFFFH Failure Time setting function executi
312. rmed before transferring each file Specification format mput source file path name Example When writing all files with PRG extension mput PRG Caution The storage destination file name is the same as the FTP client side The transmission destination is the data memory drive 4 4 open Function Specifies the host name or IP address and port number on the FTP server side and connects with the FTP server Specification format open host name port number open IP address port number Host name Host name set with Microsoft Windows hosts file IP address IP address of the Ethernet equipped module side Port number Port number to be used If omitted port number 21 is used for operation Example 1 When specifying the host name and connecting to the FTP server open HOST Example 2 When specifying the IP address and connecting to the FTP server open 192 0 1 254 Caution The IP address can be specified to create a connection when starting the FTP 1 FUNCTIONS 1 0 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server 5 106 put Function Writes the file to the CPU module Specification format put source file path name destination file path name Example 1 When writing the param PRM file to the SD memory card with the same file name put param PRM 2 param PRM Example 2 When writing the param PRM file to the SD memory card with a different
313. ror Code button to clear all the errors displayed in Latest Error Code of each connection Information about connection No 17 to 64 FTP server MELSOFT direct connection are not displayed when Compatible Ethernet is set in the network type of the RJ71EN71 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 3 3 Checking the Network Status 55 Target Module Specification Change IP Address Display Change Port No Display e Module No BoardNo 1 Port 1 1 0 Address 0000 Picno 1 gt HEX DEC HEX Stop Monitoring Status of Each Connection IP Packet ICMP Packet TCP Packet UDP Packet Total Number of Receives 44 0 44 0 Total Number of Sends 45 0 31 0 Total Number of Sum Check Error Cancels 0 0 0 0 Total Number of Echo Request Receives o0 Total Number of Echo Reply Sends Total Number of Echo Request Sends Total Number of Echo Reply Receives The following table lists the displayed items in Status of Each Protocol tab Total Number of Receives Displays the total number of received packets 0 to 4294967295 Total Number of Sends Displays the total number of sent packets 0 to 4294967295 Total Number of Sum Check Error Displays the number of times the received packet was discarded due to checksum error 0 to 4294967295 Cancels Total Number of Echo Request Displays the total number of received ICMP echo request packets 0 to 4294967295 Receives
314. rs are set checks that the initial processing for the Ethernet equipped module has completed normally Initial status Un G1900024 0 On Start the open processing using the OPEN instruction Open request signal connection 1 Un G1900008 0 On The Ethernet equipped module executes the open processing when an open request SYN is received from the external device When the open processing ends normally completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 turns on and data communication is enabled The Ethernet equipped module executes the close processing when the close request FIN is received from the external device When the close processing completes normally the open completion signal turns off and data communication is disabled 1 The open request SYN received between the initial processing normal completion to the open request standby state is handled as an error and the Ethernet equipped module sends a connection forced close RST to the external device that sent the open request SYN Point Change the connection setting before executing the OPEN instruction After the open processing is executed the open request cannot be canceled until the open processing completes Execute the close processing CLOSE instruction after open completes APPENDICES APPENDIX 223 Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications UDP IP communications This section describes the UDP IP communications
315. ruction Description SEND Sends data to another station RECV Reads the receive data from another station for main program RECVS Reads the receive data from another station for interrupt program READ Reads data from the word device of another station SREAD Reads data from the word device of another station with completion device WRITE Writes data in the word device of another station SWRITE Writes data in the word device of another station with completion device REQ Requests the remote RUN STOP to the CPU module on another station Reads writes clock data from to another station ZNRD Reads data from the word device in another station ACPU ZNWR Writes data in the word device in another station ACPU Other dedicated instructions The following table lists other instructions that can be used in the RJ71EN71 Instruction Description ERRCLEAR Turns off the LED and clears error information ERRRD Reads error information UINI Performs re initial processing 1 Availability for turning off the LED depends on the firmware version of the RJ71EN71 125 Page 240 Added and Enhanced Functions Precautions for dedicated instructions This section describes precautions when using dedicated instructions Precautions for dedicated instructions common ilWhen changing data specified by dedicated instructions Do not change any data such as control data until execution of the dedicated instruc
316. s is the same as that of the Ethernet equipped module on the own station Own station Class B IP address 81052F01H 129 5 47 1 Subnet mask FFFFFCOOH 255 255 252 0 Ethernet 4 Ethernet 1 i Ethernet 2 i i Ethernet 3 r oO r D oa r o xl R Y Y RERA AN Setting example 1 Setting example 2 Setting example 3 External device 1 External device device 2 External device 3 Class B Class A Class B IP address 81044001H 129 4 64 1 IP address 71044001H 113 4 64 1 IP address 81052902H 129 5 41 2 Ex When the network addresses differ between the Ethernet equipped module on the own station and the external device Network address Own station IP address Class B 81H 04H 40H 01H External device 1 IP address Class B 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Set the network address of the external device 1 Network address Subnet address setting value 1 1 1 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 139 2 3 Application Settings 140 Ex When the classes differ between the Ethernet equipped module on the own station and the external device Network address Own station IP address Class B External devi
317. s are connected A medium or large scale network system in which multiple small scale network systems are connected via routers or other network communication devices SWRITE A generic term for the JP SWRITE and GP SWRITE Transient transmission group number Number that is assigned for transient transmission to any given stations By specifying a group of stations as transient transmission target data can be sent to the stations of the same group number UINI A generic term for the G UINI GP UINI Z UINI and ZP UINI WRITE A generic term for the JP WRITE and GP WRITE ZNRD A generic term for the J ZNRD and JP ZNRD ZNWR A generic term for the J ZNWR and JP ZNWR 15 16 1 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product GOT Programming and monitoring of the programmable controller with the engineering tool and monitoring and testing of the FUNCTIONS programmable controller from the GOT can be performed via Ethernet This function enables remote operations using Ethernet s long distance connection and high speed communication The section describes the methods of connecting the Ethernet equipped module MELSOFT product such as engineering tool and MX Component and GOT Connection available X Connection not available Connection via a hub Connection by specifying the IP address connect to an Ethernet equipped module that has no network number and station number To connect
318. s the execution result of the ZNRD instruction 0 Completed successfully Other than 0 Completed with an error Error code is stored Un G5325 ZNWR instruction execution result Stores the execution result of the ZNWR instruction 0 Completed successfully Other than 0 Completed with an error Error code is stored The remote password lock status of each connection is stored 0 Unlocked or remote password not set 1 Lock status Un G5626 Un G5629 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 The numbers in the table indicate connection numbers Remote password lock status system port Un G5630 Un G5630 Stores the remote password lock status of the system port in bO to b4 0 Unlocked or remote password not set 1 Lock status The bits corresponding to each system port are shown below b0 Auto open UDP port b1 MELSOFT application transmission port UDP b2 MELSOFT application transmission port TCP b3 FTP transmission port b4 MELSOFT direct connection APPENDICES APPENDIX 210 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory n invalidation setting area Set the connection to be forcibly invalidated 0 Use allowed 1 Use prohibited Un G5646 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5649 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 The numbers in the table indicate connection numbers Forced c
319. s the processing for the RJ71EN71 to receive data from the external device The following receive methods can be used e Receiving with main program BUFRCV instruction Receiving with interrupt program BUFRCVS instruction Receiving with main program procedure exists The following figure shows the receive processing for the fixed buffer No 1 area corresponding to the connection No 1 Initial processing Open processing Receiving data Sending a response Initial status Un G1900024 0 9 Open completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 instruction BUFRCV instruction completion device instruction completion device 1 Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection No 1 Un G1900016 0 E m Receiving data ACK TCP only ACK J TCP only e Normal completion of the initial processing is checked Initial status Un G1900024 0 On A connection is established with the RJ71EN71 and external device and normal completion of the connection No 1 open processes is checked Page 219 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications Data is received from the external device Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection No 1 Un G1900016 0 On The BUFRCV instruction is executed and the receive data length and receive data are read from the fixed buffer No 1 Socket fixed buffer reception s
320. sary information for users Variable number of 4 1 byte 2 bytes 1 5 bytes 5 bytes characters 1 byte STX Identification Country Manufacturer Product code code code Reading data When the information is unnecessary for users and the data including the number of characters are variable Non verified reception is set in the elements Example of a packet setting 2 bytes 2 bytes Variable number of characters 1 byte Static data Non verified reception variable number of characters Static data In the above type of packet format the following operation can be executed by setting reception without verification Itis possible to store only the required information in the CPU module s device or buffer memory Even if the received packet contains data that changes with each communication it can be handled with one protocol packet APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 238 Appendix 10 Example of External Device Program An example of the program in the external device connected to the same Ethernet as the Ethernet equipped module is shown below Each program is the minimum required program for the communication test Change the IP address or port number according to the system When including process for errors add it separately External device rece
321. sets protocols appropriate to each external device and reads writes protocol setting data READ A generic term for the JP READ and GP READ RECV A generic term for the JP RECV and GP RECV RECVS A generic term for the G RECVS and Z RECVS Relay station A station that includes two or more network modules Transient transmission is performed through this station to stations on other networks REQ A generic term for the J REQ JP REQ GREQ and GPREQ Routing A process of selecting paths for communication with other networks There are two types of routing dynamic routing that auto selects the communication routes and static routing where communication routes are arbitrarily set Seamless communication Communication that allows users to access a different kind of networks without having to consider the differences as if data were exchanged within one single network SEND A generic term for the JP SEND and GP SEND SLMP The abbreviation for SeamLess Message Protocol This protocol is used to access an SLMP compatible device or a programmable controller connected to an SLMP compatible device from an external device SREAD A generic term for the JP SREAD and GP SREAD Subnet mask A number used to logically divide one network into multiple subnetworks and manage them easily The following Ethernet network systems can be configured A small scale Ethernet network system in which multiple network device
322. setting RJ71EN71 E E EN71_EE RJ71EN71 CCIEC EN71_C RJ71EN71 E CCIEC EN71 EC RJ71EN71 CCIEF EN71_F RJ71EN71 E CCIEF EN71_EF Module number A sequential number starting with 1 for identifying a module from the one with the same instance name number The port number is added to the module labels corresponding the buffer memory areas other than P1 P2 common area The following lists the characters corresponding to the port numbers 1 stPort1 2 stPort2 name A label name unique to the module BD This symbol indicates that the module label is for direct access The label without D is for refresh The following are the differences between refresh and direct access Refresh The values read written from to the module labels are reflected to the module at refresh The At refresh execution time of the program can be shortened Direct access The values read written from to the module labels are reflected to the module immediately At writing to or reading from Although the execution time of the program is longer than the one at refresh the responsiveness is the module label improved 188 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 1 Module Label Appendix 2 1 Signals This section describes the I O signals of the RJ71EN71 for the CPU module The I O signal assignment shows the case when A then start number of RJ71EN71 is 0 List of I O signals The followin
323. sic Settings gt External Device Configuration i Ethernet Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting PLC Sensor Device Address PortNo MAC Address Host Name IP Address PortNo Subnet Mask 26 UDP Pairing Receive 192 0 1100 8192 192 0 1 101 4096 UDP Pairing Send 192 0 1 100 8192 192 0 1 101 4096 T Start the predefined protocol support function XZ Tool Predefined Protocol Support Function 8 Select Ethernet Module for Module Type and click the OK button 9 Newly create the protocol setting XZ File gt New Edit Online Tool Debugging Support Function Window i Protocol 5 Kana characters NUM SCRL 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 45 46 10 seta protocol in the following item XZ Edit gt Add Protocol Adds new protocol Selection of Protocol Type to Add Predefined Protocol Library z Reference Select from Predefined Protocol Library Please select manufacturer model and protocol name from Protocol to Protocol to Add Protocol No Model Manufacturer General purpose protocol SLMP Device Read a 11 Set each packet in the following item XZ Protocol Setting window gt Packet to be set Request Protocol No 1 Protocol
324. sing the RJ71EN71 check if the following item is set to an item other than Online Set Online XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt RJ71EN71 gt Module Parameter gt Application Settings gt Module Operation Mode Communications using the link dedicated instruction cannot be performed When communications using the link dedicated instruction cannot be performed check the following items and take action Check item Action Are the network number and station number set in the Ethernet equipped module Set the network number and station number Is the number of resends set upon every instruction execution Modify the program to set the number of resends upon every instruction execution Are station numbers unique Change the duplicated station number Is the network number overlapped on the network Correct the parameters so than the network number is not overlapped 15 a communication path by the dynamic routing function is determined Power on the system and start transient transmission after a while When Dynamic Routing under Application Settings of the station on the communication path is set to Disable change it to Enable Does the relay station to be passed support the dynamic routing function If the relay station to be passed does not support the dynamic routing function set all the stations on the communication path in Routi
325. ssword can be used it is recommended to change it to another password to prevent unauthorized access New Password Confirm New Password Enter the new password in New Password and Confirm New Password when changing the password Set a password within 0 to 32 one byte characters Number alphabet special character amp can be used Command Input Monitoring Timer Set the monitoring time for the Ethernet equipped module to monitor the command input time from the FTP client It is recommended to use the default value 900s for this timer value as much as possible When changing the setting value determine the command input monitoring timer value upon consulting with the administrator of the external device or system Set a value within the following range s 1 to 16383 100 to 16383000 1 Setin increments of 100ms The FTP connection is disconnected if there is no command input from the FTP client side within the time of the command input monitoring timer value after the FTP client login When restarting the file transfer start over from the login operation again 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 133 2 3 Application Settings Response Monitoring Timer Set the monitoring time for a response from the CPU module after the Ethernet equipped module receives the request data from the external device and requests the CPU module for read write It is recommended to use the default value 5s for this timer value as much as
326. st and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C613H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C614H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C615H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C700H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C701H The IP address network number setting is incorrect in Check the IP address network number communications using the IP packet transfer function C702H The IP address station number setting is incorrect in Check the IP addresses station n
327. station number Page 141 Network Station No lt gt IP information setting Interrupt Settings Set to start up an interrupt program Page 147 Interrupt Settings IP Packet Transfer Setting Set the IP packet transfer function For details on the IP packet transfer function refer to the following CA MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Controller Network User s Manual Application CA MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application Page 147 IP Packet Transfer Setting Network Dynamic Routing 12 Set the dynamic routing Page 148 Network Dynamic Routing Module Operation Mode Set the module operation mode Page 148 Module Operation Mode 1 This setting is not available 2 This setting is not available 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 3 Application Settings for the CPU module when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Compatible Ethernet Frame Settings Set parameters for the Ethernet frame Item Description Setting range Send Frame Set the frame of the Ethernet header for the data link layer to be sent Ethernet V2 0 Frame fixed by the RJ71EN71 to the Ethernet V2 0 frame Jumbo Frame Set the frame size of the data to be sent over Ethernet Disable MTU 1500 byte Set when the data transmission speed is 1Gbps and communication is 2KB MTU 2034 byte MTU 3058 byte MTU 4082 byte MTU 5106 byte MTU 6130 byte 7KB MTU 7154 byte 8KB MT
328. subishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC iQ R series programmable controllers This manual describes the functions programming and troubleshooting of the relevant products listed below Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC iQ R series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples provided in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual Relevant products RJ71EN71 CPU module Poin tr Unless otherwise specified the buffer memory addresses in this manual are for when the P1 connecter of the RJ71ENT71 is used Check the corresponding buffer memory addresses in the list and use the correct addresses when using the following 27 Page 191 Buffer Memory CPU module P2 connector of the RJ71EN71 RJ71EN71 network type Q compatible Ethernet MEMO CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS oe 5 o Erbe ERE RI weno hd beh 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE 2 8 INTRODUCTION amp exer PET RES QA RE 8 RELEVANT MANUALS i222 argus hem OE
329. such as a lamp heater or solenoid valve a large current approximately ten times greater than normal may flow when the output is turned from off to on Therefore use a module that has a sufficient current rating After the CPU module is powered on or is reset the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration parameter settings and or program size Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the settings are being written Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM again Doing so also may cause malfunction or failure of the module When changing the operating status of the CPU module from external devices such as the remote RUN STOP functions select Do Not OPEN in Program for Open Method Setting in the module parameters If OPEN in Program is selected an execution of the remote STOP function causes the communication line to close Consequently the CPU module cannot reopen the line and external devices cannot execute the remote RUN function Installation Precautions NWARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction
330. sult receive 2008302 to 1EA4EEH to packet No 1 to 16 2008317 1EA4FDH 8318 207EH 1EA4FEH Protocol execution count 2008318 8319 2008319 207FH Protocol cancellation specification 1EA4FFH 8320 to 8335 2080H to 208FH System area 2008320 to 1EA500H to 2008335 1EA50FH 8336 to 8875 2090H to 22ABH Connection No 2 to Connection No 64 2008336 to 1EA510H to 2008875 1 72 194 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 8876 to 10999 22ACH to 2AF7H System area 2008876 to 1EA72CH to 2010999 1EAF77H 11000 2AF8H Time setting function Time setting function operation result 2011000 1EAF78H SNTP area 11001 2AF9H Time setting function execution time Year 2011001 1EAF79H 11002 2AFAH Month 2011002 1EAF7AH 11003 2AFBH Day 2011003 1EAF7BH 11004 2AFCH Hour 2011004 1EAF7CH 11005 2AFDH Minute 2011005 1EAF7DH 11006 2AFEH Second 2011006 1EAF7EH 11007 2AFFH Day of the week 2011007 1EAF7FH 11008 2B00H Time setting function required response time 2011008 1EAF80H 11009 2B01H Time setting function SNTP client execution 2011009 1EAF81H 11010 to 11049 2B02H to 2B29H System area 2011010 to 1EAF82H to 2011049 1 11050 to 11051 2B2AH to 2B2BH IP packet transfer IP packet transfer latest da
331. t are set in FTP Server Settings under Application Settings When the Ethernet equipped module FTP server receives the login name and password from the external device FTP client it checks that the login name and password are correct If the login name and password are correct transfer of the files to the Ethernet equipped module is permitted If incorrect file transfer is not permitted Locking and unlocking the remote password If the FTP communication port is specified as a remote password check target with the remote password setting unlock the remote password with the following command quote password unlock remote password When finished lock the remote password with the following command quote password lock Enter Point If the FTP communication port is specified as a remote password check target some commands cannot be used until the remote password is unlocked For details on the commands that can be used in the locked state and those that can only be used in the unlock state refer to the following lt Page 102 FTP command list Inputting the file password If a file password is set for the target file the file password must be input with the following command before the file can be accessed Write password quote passwd wr write password Read password quote passwd rd read password 1 00 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 File Transf
332. t in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area of the buffer memory in the module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the CPU module to each module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system For the system area write protect area and the use prohibited signals refer to the user s manual for the module used if communication cable is disconnected the network may be unstable resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction To maintain the safety of the programmable controller system against unauthorized access from external devices via the network take appropriate measures To maintain the safety against unauthorized access via the Internet take measures such as installing a firewall Design Precautions CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise During control of an inductive load
333. t the connector to the module Poor contact may cause malfunction Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Do not clamp the extension cables with the jacket stripped Check the interface type and correctly connect the cable Incorrect wiring connecting the cable to an incorrect interface may cause failure of the module and external device Tighten the terminal screws or connector screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit fire or malfunction When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached t
334. ta length could not be received The remaining part of the message divided at the TCP IP level could not be received within the response monitoring timer value The packets may be crowded in the line so send the data again from the external device after a random time has passed 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 173 When ASCII has been selected in the communication data code setting of the Ethernet equipped module ASCII code data which cannot be converted into binary code data has been received Check if ASCII code data which cannot be converted into binary code data has been sent from the external device C051H The number of read write points from to the device of Correct the number of read write points and send the SLMP message is out of the allowable range in the CPU SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again module in units of words C052H The number of read write points from to the device of Correct the number of read write points and send the SLMP message is out of the allowable range in the CPU SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again module in units of bits C053H The number of read write points from to the random Correct the number of read write points and send the device of SLMP message is out of the allowable range in SLMP message to the Ethernet equipped module again the CPU module in units of bits C054H The
335. ta volume 2011050 to 1EAFAAH to function area 2011051 1EAFABH 11052 to 11053 2B2CH to 2B2DH IP packet transfer maximum data volume 2011052 to 1EAFACH to 2011053 1EAFADH 11054 to 11499 2B2bEH to 2CEBH System area 2011054 to 1EAFAEH to 2011499 1EB16BH 11500 to 11514 2CECH to 2CFAH Dynamic routing function Communication path determination status 2011500 to 1EB16CH to area 2011514 1EB17AH 11515 to 11599 2CFBH to 2D4FH System area 2011515 to 1EB17BH to 2011599 1EB1CFH 11600 to 11663 2D50H to 2D8FH Remote password Connection No 1 continuous unlock failure count to Connection No 64 continuous 2011600 to 1EB1DOH to function monitoring area unlock failure count 2011663 1EB20FH 11664 2D90H Auto open UDP port continuous unlock failure count 2011664 1EB210H 11665 2D91H MELSOFT transmission port UDP IP continuous unlock failure count 2011665 1EB211H 11666 2D92H MELSOFT transmission port TCP IP continuous unlock failure count 2011666 1EB212H 11667 2D93H FTP transmission port TCP IP continuous unlock failure count 2011667 1EB213H 11668 2D94H MELSOFT direct connection continuous unlock failure count 2011668 1EB214H 11669 to 19999 2D95H to 4E1FH System area 2011669 to 1EB215H to 2019999 1ED29FH 20000 to 26143 4E20H to 661FH Random access buffer Random access buffer 2020000 to 1ED2A0H to area 2026143 1EEA9FH APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory
336. tation number lt gt IP information for the stations between the own station and the communication destination COD5H The number of retries of the link dedicated instruction is Correct the number of retries incorrect COD6H The network number or station number of the link Check if the specification network number station dedicated instruction is incorrect number for the communication destination is correct COD7H Data were sent without the initial processing completed After normal completion of the initial processing perform the communications with the external device COD8H The number of specified blocks exceeded the range Correct the number of blocks COD9H The specified subcommand of the SLMP message is Correct the subcommand incorrect CODAH Aresponse to the PING test could not be received within Correct the IP address and host name of the target the time of the communication time check module where the PING test is executed Check that the initial processing of the Ethernet equipped module where the PING test is executed is completed successfully CODBH The IP address and host name of the target module Correct the IP address and host name of the target where the PING test is execute are incorrect module where the PING test is executed CODEH Data could not be received within the specified arrival Correct the specified arrival monitoring time monitoring time Correct the channel of the link dedicated
337. tatus signal connection No 1 Un G1900016 0 Off When reading of the receive data length and receive data is completed a response is returned to the external device Q The receive processing ends If the data reception completes abnormally execute the BUFRCV instruction again and start the receive processing Point The details of the open setting are enabled at the rising edge of the RJ71EN71 open completion signal Execute the BUFRCV instruction when the socket fixed buffer reception status signal changes from OFF to ON The socket fixed buffer reception status signal does not turn on when abnormal data is received In addition data is not stored in the fixed buffer No 1 area 1 FUNCTIONS 6 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 5 66 Receiving with main program no procedure The following figure shows the receive processing for the fixed buffer No 1 area corresponding to the connection No 1 Initial processing Open processing Receiving data Initial status Un G1900024 0 9 Open completion signal connection No 1 Un G1900000 0 instruction instruction completion device BUFRCYV instruction completion device 1 Socket fixed buffer reception status signal connection No 1 Un G1900016 0 i i i i I and 1 scan ACK Receiving data TCP only Normal completion of the in
338. ted count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 15 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Connection No 16 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close Auto open UDP port Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process normal completion Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end Accumulated count of lock process based on close APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 205 20679 50C7H Monitoring area Remote password function MELSOFT application Accumulated count of monitoring area transmission port UDP unlock process normal completion 20681 50C9H Accumulated count of lock process normal completion 20682 50CAH Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end 20683 50CBH Accumulated count of lock process based on close 20684 50CCH MELSOFT
339. ted current or an overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as a fuse Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply If the external power supply is turned on first an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to manuals relevant to the network Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident Design Precautions NWARNING When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification parameter change forced output or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circui
340. tenance Precautions NCAUTION When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification parameter change forced output or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Personal Handy phone System more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction
341. ternal device 7 Page 219 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications 5 Execute the protocol with the dedicated instruction SP ECPRTCL instruction or GP ECPRTCL instruction 6 Close the connection when communication is finished Point The communication data code is binary code communication regardless of the selected settings Creating the protocol setting data Use the predefined protocol support function to create the protocol setting data XD Tool gt Predefined Protocol Support Function EE 1 Select the module for which to create the protocol setting data Module Type EE lt Caution gt The connection destination setting of predefined protocol support function is synchronous only when the predefined protocol support function starting Unable to change connection destination of predefined protocol support function when change the connection destination setting in GX Works3 after starting the predefined protocol support function Please start the predefined protocol support function again if you want to synchronize the connection destination 1 FUNCTIONS 29 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol 30 HNewly creating the protocol setting data Newly create the protocol setting data D File gt New Protocol in Predefined Protocol Library i a Editable Protocol Kana characters CAP SCRL Protocol No Displays the protocol number used
342. ternal device when the protocol communication type contains reception When received data are matched with a receive packet expected packet The received data is compared against the receive packet expected packet and the receive processing completes when the verification matches Receive packet expected packet Matched Receive data Received When multiple receive packets expected packets are specified Up to sixteen receive packets expected packets can be registered with the predefined protocol support function When the data are received the registered receive packet expected packet is verified in the order of registration The receive processing completes as soon as a matching receive packet expected packet is found Receive packets expected packets No 1 No 16 2 e 2 o w i Sixteen receive Not matched Matched packets can be registered it More 100731 MM E Receive data Received DNO RR 1 eee eer een ee 1 When received data does not match with all receive packet expected packet If the received data does not match any of the registered receive packets expected packets the received data is discarded Receive packets When sixteen expected packets No 1 No 2 m No 16 receive packets were registered Not matched Not matched Receive data Discarded L
343. tes Passive open with the specified port number The side with TCP IP connection specifies the port number waiting in the Passive open side and executes Active open This enables the TCP IP connection the connection is established and data can be exchanged For details on Active open and Passive open refer to the following Page 219 TCP IP communications Point The Active open and Passive open expression may differ according to the external device Active open TCP IP connection side client side connect side and others Passive open TCP IP connection wait side server side listen side and others BActive open The following figure shows the flow of data exchange using Active open C Start Specify the port number of the external device waiting for TCP connection and open a connection by Active open v Open processing YES Was data transfer Completed or disconnected by the external device completed Send by the SOCSND instruction or receive by Close processing the SOCRCV or SOCRCVS instruction v C End llPassive open The following figure shows the flow of data exchange using Passive open C Start Waiting for TCP connection in Passive open state Send or receive Send by the SOCSND instruction or receive by the SOCRCV or SOCRCVS instruction 1 FUNCTIONS 1 4 Socket Communications 55
344. th and receive data is completed a response is returned to the external device Q Execution of the interrupt program ends and execution of the main program resumes 1 1 Aresponse is not returned when the execution completes abnormally 1 FUNCTIONS 67 1 5 Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 68 Reception with interrupt program no procedure Use the BUFRCVS instruction for receiving data with the interrupt program The interrupt program is started when data is received from the external device It enables the reading of receive data to the CPU module The Interrupt Settings are required to use the interrupt program 27 Page 147 Interrupt Settings The following figure shows the receive processing for the fixed buffer No 2 area corresponding to the connection No 2 Initial processing Open processing Receiving data Initial status Un G1900024 0 EP 9 Open completion signal e connection No 2 Un G1900000 1 BUFRCVS instruction In interrupt processing Receiving data ACK TCP only Cycle Cycle Program Scan i Scan Interrupt processing i Scan oe Normal completion of the initial processing is checked Initial status Un G1900024 0 On A connection is established with the RJ71EN71 and external device and normal completion of the connection No 2 open processing is checked L Page 219 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications The CPU module is requ
345. th binary code data 2 5 0 0020 1 8 0 0025 When communicating with ASCII code data 2 5 0 0060 1 9 0 0065 During write When communicating with binary code data 2 5 0 0025 1 8 0 0025 When communicating with ASCII code data 2 6 0 0070 1 9 0 0060 228 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 7 Processing Time Appendix 8 Port Numbers Used by Ethernet The following port numbers are used by the system and cannot be specified equipped Module 5000 1388H For system Auto open UDP port default value 5001 1389H For system MELSOFT application communication port UDP IP 5002 138AH For system MELSOFT application communication port TCP IP 5003 138BH For system MELSOFT application direct connection port 5004 138CH For system For system 5005 138DH Auto open UDP port default value For system 5006 138EH MELSOFT application communication port UDP IP For system 5007 138FH MELSOFT application communication port TCP IP For system 5008 1390H MELSOFT application direct connection port For system 5009 1391H For system For system APPENDICES APPENDIX 229 Appendix 8 Port Numbers Used by Ethernet equipped Module Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Operation image of each communication type of protocol With the predefined protocol support function data is communicated with the external device using the Send Only Receive Only and Send amp Receive communica
346. the External Device Configuration window Restriction External devices must be set from the connection No 1 To use specific connection number set MELSOFT Connection Module in the connection number not used When only the connection No 5 is used PLC ensor Devio No Model Name EMT protocol e Setting Address Port No Addrese EN 1 MELSOFT Connection Module MELSOFT Connectic 192 168 3 40 2 MELSOFT Connection Module MELSOFT Connectic 192 168 3 40 fast MELSOFT Connection Module MELSOFT Connectie 192 168 3 40 4 MELSOFT Connection Module MELSOFT Connectic 192 168 3 40 8 5 _ UDP Connection Module Broadcast Send UDP Send 192 168 3 40 J 7 Connection Connection Connection Connection Connection No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Host Station Connected Count 5 MELSOFTC MELSOFTC MELSOFTC MELSOFTC UDP Conne onnection onnection ction Modul odule odule odule odule 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 2 Basic Settings 127 Setting items No Connection number for distinguishing settings for each user The number is set in the following connection range starting with 1 RJ71EN71 1 to 64 CPU module 1 to 16 Model Name The name of the external device is displayed Communication Measure Set the method for communication
347. the Ethernet equipped module Was a response returned to the device that had sent the command If no response was returned check if the correct IP address was specified in the command If not correct the IP address and send the command again If a response was returned check the end and error codes to correct the error Is the communication method of the connection used for communication with the external device is set to an item other than SLMP in the External Device Configuration window of Basic Settings Correct the communication method setting if an item other than SLMP is set Page 127 External Device Configuration If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure Page 153 Module communication test 1 The buffer memory address is for when the network type of the RJ71EN 71 is set to Ethernet and the P1 connector is used When using the P2 connector or the CPU module or setting the network type to Q Compatible Ethernet refer to the following C 191 Buffer Memory 2 If the connection of only the external device is closed due to cable disconnection personal computer restart or other reasons reopen the connection using the same port used before the error occurred The E71 does not close a connection if it receives an Active open request again from the external device with a different IP address or a port number
348. the connection method and enter the station number and IP address or host name for the Ethernet equipped module T Set Other Station Setting or Network Communication Route if necessary 1 The network number and station number do not need to be set when connecting with the CPU module 1 FUNCTIONS 1 1 Connection with MELSOFT Product and GOT When connecting with a hub a list of modules that can be searched for will appear by clicking the Find button on the PLC side I F Detailed Setting window Ethernet Port Direct Connection Please select Connection via HUB when you use PLC Type RJ71EN71 HUB even if there is only one target device to communicate Network No 1 Station No 1 eM in IP Address TEC IP Input Format Direct Connection is selected during communication the line Host Name becomes overloaded This might affect other devices K communication Station No lt gt IP Information Automatic Response System Search for Ethernet module on network Response Wait Time 2 Seconds Display Only CPU Type of Project V Selection IP Address Input C mo Search for Ethernet module on the same network Unable to search for the following cases No response within a specific time period Connected via a router or subnet mask is different Address 192 168 1 1 R04CPU Search tar
349. the control data If the problem cannot be resolved with the above actions the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Error Codes 177 C1C7H The request type of the REQ instruction is incorrect Execute again after correcting the request type of the REQ instruction If the problem cannot be resolved with the above actions the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C1C8H The channel specified in the dedicated instruction is in Change the channels used by own station or the target use station s channel in the control data C1C9H The device specification for the ZNRD ZNWR instruction Execute again after correcting the device specification is not correct for the ZNRD ZNWR instruction If the problem cannot be resolved with the above actions the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C1CAH The device specification for the ZNRD ZNWR instruction Execute again after correcting the device specification is not correct for the ZNRD ZNWR instruction If the problem cannot be resolved with the above actions the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C1CBH The transient data
350. the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C445H A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C446H A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C447H A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C448H A communication error has occurred with an engineering tool when executing the Ethernet diagnostics Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C449H A communication error has occurred with an engineeri
351. there is only one target device to communicate 1 If HUB is connected to other devices and also a Te DEC Ethernet Port Address c Direct Connection is selected during communication line becomes overloaded This might affect other devices communication Automatic Response System Search for Ethernet module on network Display Only CPU Type of P Address PLG Type Label Comment Point P When connecting directly with the CPU module setting also possible by clicking the CPU Module Direct Coupled Setting button on the Specify Connection Destination window Precautions Connection with LAN line Do not connect with a LAN line and set direct connection Data will be sent to all external devices on the LAN line so this setting will cause the line load to increase and will affect communication with other external devices llConnections that not direct connections Do not use a configuration in which the Ethernet equipped module and external device are connected with a hub A direct connection is not established when the devices are connected with a hub When creating a network connection on the personal computer side communication with a direct connection is not possible if two or more Ethernet ports are set to Enable Review the personal computer settings so that only the Ethernet port for the direct connection is set to Enable and the other Ethernet ports are set to
352. tion No 1 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 20596 5074H Accumulated count of lock process normal completion 20597 5075H Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end 20598 5076H Accumulated count of lock process based on close 20599 5077H Connection No 2 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 20601 5079H Accumulated count of lock process normal completion 20602 507AH Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end 20603 507BH Accumulated count of lock process based on close 20604 507CH Connection No 3 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 20606 507EH Accumulated count of lock process normal completion 20607 507FH Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end 20608 5080H Accumulated count of lock process based on close 20609 5081H Connection No 4 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 20611 5083H Accumulated count of lock process normal completion 20612 5084H Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end 20613 5085H Accumulated count of lock process based on close 20614 5086H Connection No 5 Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 20616 5088H Accumulated count of lock process normal completion 20617 5089H Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end 20618 508AH Accumulated count of lock process based on close APPENDICES APPENDIX 203 Appendix 3 Buffer M
353. tion communication start end Communication using the TCP connection with the external device was started or ended FTP connection start stop FTP connection was started from the external device or disconnected Receive frame error Receive frame error was detected Ethernet equipped module was connected to the CC Link IE Controller Network or CC Link IE Field Network Time synchronization failure No response was returned from the time information server SNTP server and time synchronization has failed Restart by a program The module was restarted by the program Link down Link down has occurred when network cable connected to the external device was disconnected Data length error The send receive data length exceeds the allowable range Initial processing error Socket communications or communications using a fixed buffer were executed before the initial processing was completed Specification IP address error Broadcast address was specified to the IP address of the external device other than Unpassive Socket communications transmission failed Message send of the socket communications has failed Not opened open processing of the external device has not been completed The connection with the external device is closed Alive check error The existence of the external device could not be checked within the response monitoring timer value
354. tion is completed When the dedicated instruction is not completed Check whether the mode of the RJ71EN771 is online A dedicated instruction cannot be executed when the mode is offline or module communication test Precautions for link dedicated instructions The following describes precautions when executing multiple link dedicated instructions simultaneously Channel of the link dedicated instructions When executing multiple link dedicated instructions simultaneously check that the channels for the instructions are not duplicated Link dedicated instructions with the same channel cannot be executed simultaneously To use the same channel for multiple link dedicated instructions configure an interlock so that a instruction is executed after completion of another APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 4 Dedicated Instruction 218 Appendix 5 TCP IP Communications UDP IP Communications This chapter describes the communication flow and procedure of TCP IP communications and UDP IP communications TCP IP communications This section describes TCP IP communications Establishing a connection With TCP IP communications a connection must be established between the communicating devices If the server side device has executed the Passive open processing and is in the standby state the client side device makes an open request Active open processing to the server When a response is returned the connection is established With TCP
355. tion path that accesses the CPU module The security function has the following access restriction methods Function Description IP filter function Identifies the IP address of the other device side and prevents access from an illegal IP address Access is restricted by setting to pass or block access from the IP address external device set in the parameters Remote password Prevent illegal access of the programmable controller from an external device The remote password set with the parameters authorizes permits access from an external device and restricts access from an unauthorized external device IP filter function Identifies the IP address of the access source and prevents access from an illegal IP address The IP address of the external device to be passed or blocked is set in the parameters and access from external devices is restricted Use of this function is recommended when using in an environment connected to a LAN line Ethernet External device IP address 192 168 1 2 Access permitted BRL Ethernet equipped module Access permitted External device IP address 192 168 1 3 Access prohibited Se External device IP address 192 168 1 5 N Restriction This setting is not available when the RJ71EN71 network type is set to Q Compatible Ethernet
356. tion types This section describes the operation images of each communication type For Send Only communication type The specified packet is sent once Send data Ethernet equipped Data Header External device module The operation image of Send Only is shown below When the instruction completed successfully ECPRTCL instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Waiting time to send Ethernet equipped module Send packet External device Send packet When the instruction completed with an error at TCP IP timeout error An error has x occurred ECPRTCL instruction Completion device o The device x turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Waiting time to send t TCP ULP timer gt lt gt Ethernet equipped module Send packet The packet cannot be sent or i no response is received from External device the external device 230 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 9 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Point For details on errors that occur when the communication completed abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory Page 169 List of Error Codes For Receive Only communication type When data is received from the external device it is verified with t
357. tring 16 bit 0 17 VAR GLOBAL wResult Word Signed VAR_GLOBAL 01100 sd EN71 EE 1 0 71 EE _1 bnCo 71 EE 1 bR bStart mpletion Ethernetl mpletion_Connecti eady_Predefine DO nitialized D O onOpen D 1 dProtocol D 0 MO U01G1900024 0 001619000000 U01G1901002 0 INC Itl I I FI HO D1 MOV HOFF D2 MOV H3FF D3 MOV H10 D4 MOV K100 D5 DMOV H0A8 D7 MOV K10 D8 MOV K1 uCountrolDa MOV ta 2 D1002 UO K1 K1 uCountrolDa bComp GP ECPRTC ta 01000 M1 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol bComp 0 bComp 1 bComp OK 45 M1 M2 SET i me bComp 1 bComp NG M2 SET E p M11 uCountrolDa wResult MOVP trt D1001 D1100 55 END 0 When bStart MO is turned on the protocol is executed by the GP ECPRTCL instruction and D100 to D109 of the receiving side CPU module is read and stored in D14 to D23 of the sending side CPU module bComp OK M10 is turned on when the protocol completed successfully DO to D8 stores the following as a protocol setting data DO Serial No The number increases one by one each time the bStart MO is turned on D1 Network No Because the access destination is the connected station own station is stored as the request destination network number D2 Station No FFH Because the access destination is the connected station own station FFH is stored as the request destination statio
358. uction Point The number of protocols and packets that can be registered is as follow Protocols 128 maximum Packets 256 maximum Packet data area size 12288 bytes maximum When the number of packets reaches the upper limit protocols cannot be added even if the number of protocols has not reached the upper limit If the packet data area size reaches the upper limit protocols and packets cannot be added even if the number of protocols and packets has not reached the upper limit Applicable connections The connections No 1 to 16 of the P1 connector can be used for the communications using the predefined protocol Communications using the predefined protocol cannot be used with the P2 connector 28 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Communications Using the Predefined Protocol Data communication procedures When the predefined protocol support function is used data can be exchanged with the external device using the following procedure 1 Select create or edit the protocol with the predefined protocol support function and write the protocol setting data 127 Page 29 Creating the protocol setting data 2 Setthe module parameter Page 34 Setting procedure 3 Write the parameters to the CPU module and check that initial processing of the Ethernet equipped module completed successfully Initial status Un G1900024 0 On 4 Perform the open processing to establish a connection between the Ethernet equipped module and ex
359. uction Description GP CONOPEN Establishes a connection OPEN GP CONCLOSE Closes the connection CLOSE BUFRCV Reads the receive data from the external device BUFRCVS Reads the receive data with an interrupt program BUFSND Sends data to the external device 1 This function cannot be used when Q Compatible Ethernet is selected in the network type Applicable connections The connections No 1 to 16 of the P1 connector can be used for the communications using a fixed buffer Communications using a fixed buffer cannot be used with the P2 connector Communication structure This section describes the mechanism of communication with fixed buffer communication Data flow Dedicated instructions are used to send and receive data in fixed buffer communication Page 61 Applicable dedicated instructions With Procedure Exist the CPU module and external device exchange data one on one A handshake is established with the external device when sending data form the CPU module and receiving data from the external device With No Procedure data is sent from the CPU module and received from the external device without a procedure RJ71EN71 m Fixed buffer BUFSND instruction No 1 No 2 No 3 1 lt BUFRCV instruction Nod J CPU module EE External device No 16 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 Commun
360. ule when using a multi CPU system configuration This may also display the current access destination CPU module Specification format quote cpuchg access destination CPU module Access destination CPU module Specify the CPU module from which files are to be accessed Shows the method for specifying the access destination CPU module No input Checks the current access destination CPU module e controlPLC Specifies the control CPU as the access destination CPU module no1 Specifies the CPU No 1 as the access destination CPU module no2 Specifies the CPU No 2 as the access destination CPU module no3 Specifies the CPU No 3 as the access destination CPU module no4 Specifies the CPU No 4 as the access destination CPU module The execution results when the access is completed normally are shown in the following manner When setting access destination CPU module 200 Command Okey When displaying access destination CPU module 200 Target cpu is access destination CPU module The following appears if the specified access destination CPU module is not found 557 Cpu not found Example 1 When specifying control CPU as access destination CPU module quote cpuchg controlPLC Example 2 When displaying the currently set access destination CPU module quote cpuchg Caution The access destination CPU module after logging into the RJ71EN71 with the open user command is the RJ71EN71 control CPU passwd rd
361. umber communications using the IP packet transfer function C703H The destination IP address upper level setting is Check the destination IP address incorrect in communications using the IP packet transfer function C704H The destination IP address lower level setting is Check the destination IP address incorrect in communications using the IP packet transfer function C705H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C706H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C707H The module processing was completed with an error Execute the communication status test and if the test was completed with an error take the corrective action Execute the module communication test and check that there is no failure in the module C708H IP packet transfer function of the Ethernet equipped When communicating with the IP packet transfer module connected with the Ethernet devices is set to function set the IP packet transfer setting to Use Not Use when communicating with the IP packet transfer function C709H A communicat
362. unications using the random access buffer Data flow The following figure shows the flow of data communications using the random access buffer A dedicated packet is used to exchange data between the RJ71EN71 and external device A program is used to access the random access buffer from the CPU module Point The process is executed asynchronously with the program so if synchronization is required use socket communications or communications using a fixed buffer External devices capable of data exchange Data can be exchanged with the following external devices Devices in Ethernet to which the RJ71ENT71 is connected Device connected via router Procedure for reading from external device The following figure shows the procedure for sending data from the RJ71ENT71 in response to a read request from the external device CPU module RJ71EN71 Random access e Writing using the TO buffer instruction Read t d ead request command ACK TCP only _ Response data read M ACK TCP only External device After the module parameters are set check that the RJ71EN71 initial processing has completed normally Initial status Un G1900024 0 On The open processing is executed to establish a connection between the RJ71EN71 and external device lt Page 219 TCP IP Communic
363. upported The external device with FTP client function can easily and directly access files in the CPU module The following operations can be executed on the CPU module files from the external device with FTP client function Ethernet equipped module FTP server External device FTP client Parameters Programs Storage files Data Read lt write Ethernet Reading of file from CPU module download Writing of file to CPU module upload Browsing of file names in CPU module Point When using the file transfer function FTP server with multi CPU system configuration the following CPU module is accessed immediately after logging in To change the access destination CPU module execute the cpuchg command Control CPU when the RJ71EN71 is connected CPU module connected with Ethernet cable when CPU module is connected 98 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server Data communication procedures The following section describes the settings for FTP communication Setting in the Ethernet equipped module side To use the file transfer function FTP server set Use for FTP Server in FTP Server Settings under Application Settings For details on other setting items refer to the following L Page 133 FTP Server Settings Operations on external device FTP client side This section describes the procedures and required processes on the e
364. using this command If this command is used in the FTP client program the program does not need be modified when replacing the MELSEC Q series Set the CPU module to the STOP state before writing 1 FUNCTIONS 4 09 1 8 File Transfer Function FTP server Precautions Precautions for designing system Design the system such as configuration of interlock circuits in the program so that the entire system always functions properly during file transfer to the operating system and during status control of the programmable controller FTP client The FTP command specifications may differ from this manual depending on the FTP client In this case refer to the manual for the FTP client and check the functions and operation methods FTP operations are not possible from Microsoft Internet Explorer If attempted Internet Explorer will issue an error Specify the IP address for the FTP command without zero fill Do not set 1 as 001 Processing on CPU module side Only the drive of the CPU module on the own station can access files Do not power off or reset it or insert eject the SD memory card during file access The file could be damaged if these are attempted Do not manipulate the files from a peripheral such as an engineering tool while accessing the files This also applies to online operations such as writing during RUN as the files are manipulated If the file is manipulated from another de
365. values of the Ethernet function and data used for data communication of the multiple CPU function BUFRCV A generic term for the GP BUFRCV and ZP BUFRCV BUFRCVS A generic term for the GBUFRCVS and Z BUFRCVS BUFSND A generic term for the GP BUFSND and ZP BUFSND CLOSE A generic term for the GP CLOSE and ZP CLOSE Control CPU A CPU module that controls connected I O modules and intelligent function modules In a multiple CPU system there are multiple CPU modules and each connected module can be controlled by a different CPU module CPU module A generic term for the MELSEC iQ R series CPU module Dedicated instruction An instruction for using functions of the module Device A device X Y M D or others in a CPU module Engineering tool Another term for the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers ERRCLEAR A generic term for the GP ERRCLEAR and ZP ERRCLEAR ERRRD A generic term for the GP ERRRD and ZP ERRRD Ethernet device A generic term for the devices supporting IP communication such as personal computers Ethernet equipped module External device A generic term for the RJ71EN71 when the Ethernet function is used and MELSEC iQ R series CPU module when the Ethernet function is used A generic term for personal computers connected with Ethernet for data communication and other Ethernet equipped modules FTP The abbreviation for File Transfer Proto
366. ve device No Entry Monitor 0801 00110 Registers the device to be read by Execute Monitor command 0802 Device 0002 Execute Monitor 0802 0000 Reads the value of device registered by Entry Monitor Device command 0801 Read Block 0406 0000 Reads data by treating points of word devices or bit devices one point is equivalent 0002 16 bits as one block and specifying multiple blocks This can be specified with inconsecutive device No Write Block 1406 00110 Writes data by treating n points of word devices bit devices one point is equivalent 0002 16 bits as one block and specifying multiple blocks This can be specified with inconsecutive device No Label Array Label Read 041A 0000 Reads data from array type labels or labels whose structure members are the array Array Label Write 141A 0000 Writes data to array type labels or labels whose and structure members are the array Read Random 041C 0000 Specifies labels and reads the data Write Random 141B 0000 Specifies labels and writes data Memory Read 0613 0000 Reads the buffer memory data of own station SLMP compatible device Write 1613 0000 Writes the data in the buffer memory of own station SLMP compatible device Extend Unit Read 0601 0000 Reads the data in the buffer memory of intelligent function module Write 1601 0000 Writes the data in the buffer memory of intelligent function module 26 1 FUNCTIONS 1 2 SLMP Communications
367. vice during the file transfer function FTP server operation the peripheral may issue an error If the processing has been halted due to an error re execute the processing before quitting the FTP function Communication processing If a timeout error occurs during file transfer the TCP IP connection will be closed Log into the Ethernet equipped module with the FTP client again before resuming file transfer The existence of the external device is checked with the FTP connection The file transfer processing time will differ according to the Ethernet line s load rate line congestion the number of connections being used simultaneously other connection s communication processing and system configuration distance between FTP server and FTP client method of accessing CPU module Only one external device FTP client can log into the Ethernet equipped module at one time If a connection is attempted from another FTP client in the login state an error will occur without establishing the connection If another communication function is simultaneously executed with DUP IP during file transfer with FTP a timeout error and others may occur Either communicate after the file is transferred or communicate with TCP IP Writing files Files cannot be written over existing files and saved Write the file after deleting the existing file with the file delete command delete mdelete or renaming with the file rename command rena
368. vice Configuration window of Basic Settings Socket communications Socket Communication Communications using a fixed buffer Fixed Buffer Procedure Exist or Fixed Buffer No Procedure Correct the communication method setting if an item other than the one described in the left is set 2 57 Page 127 External Device Configuration Is the communication method of the connection used for communication with the external device is set to an item other than Broadcast Send or Broadcast Receive in the External Device Configuration window of Basic Settings when broadcast communications is performed Correct the communication method setting if an item other than the one described in the left is set 25 Page 127 External Device Configuration If the above action does not solve the problem perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure Page 153 Module communication test 1 The buffer memory address is for when the network type of the RJ71EN 71 is set to Ethernet and the P1 connector is used When using the P2 connector or the CPU module or setting the network type to Q Compatible Ethernet refer to the following Page 191 Buffer Memory 2 If the connection of only the external device is closed due to cable disconnection personal computer restart or other reasons reopen the connection using the same port used before the error occurred The E71 does not close a connection if it re
369. word Detail Setting window T Detail Setting for the target module 1 FUNCTIONS 1 10 Security Function 1 1 5 4 rite the remote password to the CPU module 5 Theremote password is enabled when the CPU module is powered off and on or reset Access permit prohibit processing operation This section describes the processing for permitting or prohibiting access of the CPU module with remote password by the external device permit processing Unlock processing The external device trying to communicate unlocks the remote password set for the connected Ethernet equipped module If the password is not unlocked the Ethernet equipped module to which the external device is connected prohibits access so an error occurs in the external device The unlocking method is shown below SLMP dedicated command Password Unlock Dedicated command password unlock for file transfer function FTP server Input password from engineering tool llAccess processing Access to the specified station is possible when the remote password is correctly unlocked Execute the arbitrary access prohibit processing Lock processing When access to the specified station ends lock the remote password from the external device to disable subsequent access The locking method is shown below SLMP dedicated command Password Lock Dedicated command password lock for file transfer function FTP server Lock with eng
370. xternal Device Configuration 1 Selectthe external device to be connected in Module List and drag it to List of devices or Device map area UDP Connection Module Select to communicate with the external device using UDP IP Active Connection Module Select to perform the open processing to the external device from the Ethernet equipped module Active open and communicate using TCP IP Unpassive Connection Module Select to receive the open processing from a unspecified external device Unpassive open and communicate using TCP IP Fullpassive Connection Module Select to receive the open processing from the specified external device Fullpassive open and communicate using TCP IP 2 Set Communication Method for the external device to Socket Communication 3 Setthe other parameters required for communication in the connection 1 FUNCTIONS 1 4 Socket Communications Applicable dedicated instructions The following table lists the dedicated instructions for exchanging data with socket communications For details on dedicated instructions refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks icated instructions The following table lists the dedicated instructions used by each module instructions used by the RJ71EN71 GP CONOPEN Establishes a connection GP CONCLOSE Closes the connection GP SOCRCV Reads the receive data from the
371. xternal device side for using the Ethernet equipped module s file transfer function FTP server The FTP commands and input format used for the operation are shown in the explanation Esterl means to input CR Enter or the Return key Start E Start the FTP client ftp Enter Y Login to the Ethernet equipped module open Ethernet equipped module s IP address NO s the communication port subject to remote password heck YES quote password unlock Unlock the remote password remote password Emed Is file transfer YES completed NO NO Is the FTP YES Communication port subject to remote password check Write files to the FTP server NO YES Y File reading File writing Lock the remote password quote password lock Enter No file conversion is notified binary Enter No file conversion is notified Enter e Disconnect from bye E dir Een dir Exi or the Ethernet equipped module yel Check the file list Check the file list or Is Enter Is Enter NO Does the write X End Does the read
372. y other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 244 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range

MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User`s Manual (Application)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents